US20190264893A9 - Lighting System for Color Mixing - Google Patents
Lighting System for Color Mixing Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20190264893A9 US20190264893A9 US15/076,579 US201615076579A US2019264893A9 US 20190264893 A9 US20190264893 A9 US 20190264893A9 US 201615076579 A US201615076579 A US 201615076579A US 2019264893 A9 US2019264893 A9 US 2019264893A9
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- led
- light
- array
- lighting system
- response
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Granted
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A01—AGRICULTURE; FORESTRY; ANIMAL HUSBANDRY; HUNTING; TRAPPING; FISHING
- A01G—HORTICULTURE; CULTIVATION OF VEGETABLES, FLOWERS, RICE, FRUIT, VINES, HOPS OR SEAWEED; FORESTRY; WATERING
- A01G7/00—Botany in general
- A01G7/04—Electric or magnetic or acoustic treatment of plants for promoting growth
- A01G7/045—Electric or magnetic or acoustic treatment of plants for promoting growth with electric lighting
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A01—AGRICULTURE; FORESTRY; ANIMAL HUSBANDRY; HUNTING; TRAPPING; FISHING
- A01G—HORTICULTURE; CULTIVATION OF VEGETABLES, FLOWERS, RICE, FRUIT, VINES, HOPS OR SEAWEED; FORESTRY; WATERING
- A01G9/00—Cultivation in receptacles, forcing-frames or greenhouses; Edging for beds, lawn or the like
- A01G9/24—Devices or systems for heating, ventilating, regulating temperature, illuminating, or watering, in greenhouses, forcing-frames, or the like
- A01G9/249—Lighting means
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21K—NON-ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES USING LUMINESCENCE; LIGHT SOURCES USING ELECTROCHEMILUMINESCENCE; LIGHT SOURCES USING CHARGES OF COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL; LIGHT SOURCES USING SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AS LIGHT-GENERATING ELEMENTS; LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21K9/00—Light sources using semiconductor devices as light-generating elements, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] or lasers
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21K—NON-ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES USING LUMINESCENCE; LIGHT SOURCES USING ELECTROCHEMILUMINESCENCE; LIGHT SOURCES USING CHARGES OF COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL; LIGHT SOURCES USING SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AS LIGHT-GENERATING ELEMENTS; LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21K9/00—Light sources using semiconductor devices as light-generating elements, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] or lasers
- F21K9/20—Light sources comprising attachment means
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21K—NON-ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES USING LUMINESCENCE; LIGHT SOURCES USING ELECTROCHEMILUMINESCENCE; LIGHT SOURCES USING CHARGES OF COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL; LIGHT SOURCES USING SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AS LIGHT-GENERATING ELEMENTS; LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21K9/00—Light sources using semiconductor devices as light-generating elements, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] or lasers
- F21K9/20—Light sources comprising attachment means
- F21K9/23—Retrofit light sources for lighting devices with a single fitting for each light source, e.g. for substitution of incandescent lamps with bayonet or threaded fittings
- F21K9/232—Retrofit light sources for lighting devices with a single fitting for each light source, e.g. for substitution of incandescent lamps with bayonet or threaded fittings specially adapted for generating an essentially omnidirectional light distribution, e.g. with a glass bulb
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V23/00—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices
- F21V23/003—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being electronics drivers or controllers for operating the light source, e.g. for a LED array
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V23/00—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices
- F21V23/04—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being switches
- F21V23/0435—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being switches activated by remote control means
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V23/00—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices
- F21V23/04—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being switches
- F21V23/0442—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being switches activated by means of a sensor, e.g. motion or photodetectors
- F21V23/0457—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being switches activated by means of a sensor, e.g. motion or photodetectors the sensor sensing the operating status of the lighting device, e.g. to detect failure of a light source or to provide feedback to the device
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V29/00—Protecting lighting devices from thermal damage; Cooling or heating arrangements specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
- F21V29/50—Cooling arrangements
- F21V29/502—Cooling arrangements characterised by the adaptation for cooling of specific components
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V29/00—Protecting lighting devices from thermal damage; Cooling or heating arrangements specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
- F21V29/50—Cooling arrangements
- F21V29/60—Cooling arrangements characterised by the use of a forced flow of gas, e.g. air
- F21V29/67—Cooling arrangements characterised by the use of a forced flow of gas, e.g. air characterised by the arrangement of fans
- F21V29/677—Cooling arrangements characterised by the use of a forced flow of gas, e.g. air characterised by the arrangement of fans the fans being used for discharging
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V9/00—Elements for modifying spectral properties, polarisation or intensity of the light emitted, e.g. filters
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B45/00—Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
- H05B45/20—Controlling the colour of the light
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21S—NON-PORTABLE LIGHTING DEVICES; SYSTEMS THEREOF; VEHICLE LIGHTING DEVICES SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR VEHICLE EXTERIORS
- F21S2/00—Systems of lighting devices, not provided for in main groups F21S4/00 - F21S10/00 or F21S19/00, e.g. of modular construction
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V29/00—Protecting lighting devices from thermal damage; Cooling or heating arrangements specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
- F21V29/50—Cooling arrangements
- F21V29/70—Cooling arrangements characterised by passive heat-dissipating elements, e.g. heat-sinks
- F21V29/74—Cooling arrangements characterised by passive heat-dissipating elements, e.g. heat-sinks with fins or blades
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21W—INDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES F21K, F21L, F21S and F21V, RELATING TO USES OR APPLICATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS
- F21W2131/00—Use or application of lighting devices or systems not provided for in codes F21W2102/00-F21W2121/00
- F21W2131/40—Lighting for industrial, commercial, recreational or military use
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21Y—INDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES F21K, F21L, F21S and F21V, RELATING TO THE FORM OR THE KIND OF THE LIGHT SOURCES OR OF THE COLOUR OF THE LIGHT EMITTED
- F21Y2105/00—Planar light sources
- F21Y2105/10—Planar light sources comprising a two-dimensional array of point-like light-generating elements
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21Y—INDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES F21K, F21L, F21S and F21V, RELATING TO THE FORM OR THE KIND OF THE LIGHT SOURCES OR OF THE COLOUR OF THE LIGHT EMITTED
- F21Y2105/00—Planar light sources
- F21Y2105/10—Planar light sources comprising a two-dimensional array of point-like light-generating elements
- F21Y2105/12—Planar light sources comprising a two-dimensional array of point-like light-generating elements characterised by the geometrical disposition of the light-generating elements, e.g. arranging light-generating elements in differing patterns or densities
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21Y—INDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES F21K, F21L, F21S and F21V, RELATING TO THE FORM OR THE KIND OF THE LIGHT SOURCES OR OF THE COLOUR OF THE LIGHT EMITTED
- F21Y2113/00—Combination of light sources
- F21Y2113/10—Combination of light sources of different colours
- F21Y2113/13—Combination of light sources of different colours comprising an assembly of point-like light sources
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21Y—INDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES F21K, F21L, F21S and F21V, RELATING TO THE FORM OR THE KIND OF THE LIGHT SOURCES OR OF THE COLOUR OF THE LIGHT EMITTED
- F21Y2115/00—Light-generating elements of semiconductor light sources
- F21Y2115/10—Light-emitting diodes [LED]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B45/00—Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
- H05B45/30—Driver circuits
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B45/00—Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
- H05B45/30—Driver circuits
- H05B45/37—Converter circuits
- H05B45/3725—Switched mode power supply [SMPS]
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02A—TECHNOLOGIES FOR ADAPTATION TO CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02A40/00—Adaptation technologies in agriculture, forestry, livestock or agroalimentary production
- Y02A40/10—Adaptation technologies in agriculture, forestry, livestock or agroalimentary production in agriculture
- Y02A40/25—Greenhouse technology, e.g. cooling systems therefor
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02P—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN THE PRODUCTION OR PROCESSING OF GOODS
- Y02P60/00—Technologies relating to agriculture, livestock or agroalimentary industries
- Y02P60/14—Measures for saving energy, e.g. in green houses
Definitions
- This invention relates generally to a lighting system which provides a plurality of colors.
- LEDs light emitting diodes
- U.S. Pat. No. 6,688,759 to Hadjimichael More information regarding lighting systems for growing plants can be found in U.S. Pat. No. 6,688,759 to Hadjimichael, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. Information regarding lighting systems that utilize LEDs can be found in U.S. Pat. No. 5,012,609 to Ignatius et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,278,432 to Ignatius et al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,474,838 to Fang et al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,602,275 to Sullivan, U.S. Pat. No.
- the present invention is directed to a lighting system for providing a desired color of light.
- the novel features of the invention are set forth with particularity in the appended claims. The invention will be best understood from the following description when read in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
- FIG. 1 a is a block diagram of a lighting system, which includes two inputs operatively coupled to an LED array through an LED controller.
- FIG. 1 b is a more detailed block diagram of the lighting system of FIG. 1 a.
- FIG. 1 c is a more detailed front view of one embodiment of the LED array of FIG. 1 a , which includes two LED sub-arrays.
- FIG. 2 a is a schematic diagram of one input of FIG. 1 a operatively coupled to one of the LED sub-arrays through an LED driver circuit, wherein the input operates as a potentiometer.
- FIG. 2 b is a schematic diagram of the other input of FIG. 1 a operatively coupled to another of the LED sub-arrays through another LED driver circuit 141 , wherein the other input operates as a potentiometer.
- FIG. 3 a is a graph of a wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system of FIG. 1 a.
- FIG. 3 b is a graph of another wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system of FIG. 1 a.
- FIG. 3 c is a graph of a wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system of FIG. 1 a , wherein the wavelength spectrum includes color mixing.
- FIGS. 4 a and 4 b are graphs of wavelength spectra of light provided by the lighting system of FIG. 1 a , and action spectrum corresponding to chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b, respectively.
- FIGS. 4 c and 4 d are graphs of wavelength spectra of light provided by the lighting system of FIG. 1 a , and action spectrum corresponding to ⁇ -carotene.
- FIGS. 4 e and 4 f are graphs of wavelength spectra of light provided by the lighting system of FIG. 1 a , and action spectrum corresponding to ⁇ -carotene.
- FIG. 4 g is a graph of wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system of FIG. 1 a , and action spectrum corresponding to pelargonin (Perlargonidin-3, 5-diglucoside).
- FIG. 4 h is a graph of wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system of FIG. 1 a , and action spectrum corresponding to phycocyanin.
- FIG. 4 i is a graph of wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system of FIG. 1 a , and action spectrum corresponding to phycoerythrin.
- FIGS. 5 a and 5 b are bottom and top perspective views, respectively, of an embodiment of a lighting system.
- FIGS. 5 c and 5 d are top and back perspective views of the lighting system of FIGS. 5 a and 5 b.
- FIG. 5 e is a front perspective view of the lighting system of FIGS. 5 a and 5 b.
- FIG. 5 f is a front view of a first LED array of the lighting system of FIGS. 5 a and 5 b , wherein the first LED array includes five LED sub-arrays carried by an LED array support structure.
- FIG. 5 g is a front view of a second LED array of the lighting system of FIGS. 5 a and 5 b , wherein the second LED array includes five LED sub-arrays carried by an LED array support structure.
- FIGS. 6 a and 6 b are block diagram of the lighting system of FIGS. 5 a and 5 b , which includes five inputs operatively coupled to the first and second LED arrays through an LED controller, wherein the LED controller includes first and second LED sub-controllers.
- FIGS. 7 a , 7 b , 7 c , 7 d and 7 e are schematic diagrams of the inputs of FIGS. 5 a and 5 b operatively coupled to the first LED sub-array through the first LED driver circuit, wherein the inputs operate as potentiometers.
- FIGS. 8 a , 8 b , 8 c , 8 d and 8 e are schematic diagrams of the inputs of FIGS. 5 a and 5 b operatively coupled to the second LED sub-array through the second LED driver circuit, wherein the inputs operate as potentiometers.
- FIGS. 9 a , 9 b and 9 c are graphs of wavelength spectra of light provided by the lighting system of FIGS. 5 a and 5 b , wherein the wavelength spectrum includes color mixing.
- FIG. 9 d is a graph of a wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system of FIGS. 5 a and 5 b , wherein, and the wavelength spectrum of chlorophyll a.
- FIG. 9 e is a graph of a wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system of FIGS. 5 a and 5 b , wherein, and the wavelength spectrum of ⁇ -carotene.
- FIG. 9 f is a graph of a wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system of FIGS. 5 a and 5 b , wherein, and the wavelength spectrum of pelargonin.
- FIG. 9 g is a graph of a wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system of FIGS. 5 a and 5 b , wherein, and the wavelength spectrum of sunlight.
- FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a lighting system, which includes a programmable logic controller operatively coupled to an LED array through an LED controller.
- FIGS. 11 a and 11 b are bottom and top perspective views, respectively, of an embodiment of a lighting system.
- FIGS. 11 c and 11 d are top and back perspective views of the lighting system of FIGS. 11 a and 11 b.
- FIG. 11 e is a front perspective view of the lighting system of FIGS. 11 a and 11 b.
- FIG. 12 a is a block diagram of one embodiment of a lighting system.
- FIG. 12 b is a block diagram of one embodiment of a lighting system.
- FIG. 13 a is a schematic diagram of one embodiment of the lighting system of FIG. 12 a.
- FIG. 13 b is a schematic diagram of one embodiment of the lighting system of FIG. 12 b.
- FIG. 14 a is a schematic diagram of one embodiment of the lighting system of FIG. 12 a , which includes a memory.
- FIG. 14 b is a schematic diagram of one embodiment of the lighting system of FIG. 12 b , which includes a memory.
- FIG. 15 is a block diagram of one embodiment of a lighting system, which includes a computer module.
- FIG. 16 is a diagram of a lighting system network, which includes a plurality of networked lighting systems.
- FIG. 1 a is a block diagram of a lighting system 100 a , which includes inputs 110 and 111 operatively coupled to an LED array 102 through an LED controller 130 .
- Lighting system 100 a includes a power supply 108 which provides a power signal S Power to LED controller 130 through a power terminal 108 a.
- LED array 102 includes two or more different types of LEDs, which are capable of emitting different wavelength spectrums of light. LEDs of the same type emit the same wavelength spectrums of light, and LEDs of different types emit different wavelength spectrum of light.
- a wavelength spectrum of light is the intensity of light emitted by the LED versus the wavelength of the light, and corresponds to a color of the light.
- the wavelengths spectrum of light can be determined in many different ways, such as with a spectrometer. Examples of wavelength spectrums of light are discussed in more detail below with the graphs shown in FIGS. 3 a -3 c and FIGS. 4 a - 4 i.
- wavelengths of blue and green light emitted by an LED typically overlap in a wavelength range of about 485 nanometers to about 505 nanometers.
- wavelengths of blue and violet light emitted by an LED typically overlap in a wavelength range of about 440 nm to about 460 nm.
- the wavelength range of blue light is between about 450 nm to about 495 nm
- the wavelength range of green light is between about 495 nm to about 570 nm.
- an LED emits light in response to being activated, and an LED does not emit light in response to being deactivated.
- An LED is activated in response to driving a current through it to a current level above a threshold current level. Further, an LED is deactivated in response to driving a current through it to a current level below the threshold current level.
- an LED of LED array 102 is activated in response to receiving a signal from LED controller 130 , as will be discussed in more detail below.
- lighting system 100 a provides color mixing.
- the light of the LEDs of LED array 102 can be mixed together to provide a desired wavelength spectrum of light.
- the intensity of the light emitted by a single LED typically has a Gaussian wavelength distribution.
- some LEDs, such as those which provide white light have intensities that have non-Gaussian wavelength distributions.
- An LED which provides white light and has an intensity having a non-Gaussian wavelength distribution will be discussed in more detail below with FIG. 9 g.
- the wavelength spectrum of the light emitted by an LED can be chosen in response to choosing the band gap energy of the semiconductor material of the LED.
- the band gap energy of the semiconductor material of the LED is typically chosen by choosing the semiconductor material composition.
- the semiconductor material composition can be chosen during growth. It should be noted that the wavelength distribution of the light emitted by an LED can be chosen in response to choosing the semiconductor material composition.
- the semiconductor materials included with different types of LEDs can be of many different types, several of which will be discussed in more detail presently.
- LEDs which emit IR light can include many different types of semiconductor materials, such as gallium arsenide and aluminum gallium arsenide. Further, LEDs which emit red light can include many different types of semiconductor materials, such as aluminum gallium arsenide, gallium arsenide phosphide, aluminum gallium indium phosphide and gallium phosphide.
- LEDs which emit orange light can include many different types of semiconductor materials, such as gallium arsenide phosphide, aluminum gallium indium phosphide and gallium phosphide. Further, LEDs which emit yellow light can include many different types of semiconductor materials, such as gallium arsenide phosphide, aluminum gallium indium phosphide and gallium phosphide.
- LEDs which emit green light can include many different types of semiconductor materials, such as indium gallium nitride/gallium nitride heterostructure, gallium phosphide, aluminum gallium indium phosphide and aluminum gallium phosphide. Further, LEDs which emit blue light can include many different types of semiconductor materials, such as zinc selenide and indium gallium nitride.
- LEDs which emit violet light can include many different types of semiconductor materials, such as indium gallium nitride. Further, LEDs which emit ultraviolet light can include many different types of semiconductor materials, such as aluminum nitride, aluminum gallium nitride, and aluminum gallium indium nitride.
- LEDs which emit purple light typically include a blue LED coated with a red phosphor or a white LED coated with a purple plastic.
- LEDs which emit white light can include a blue LED coated with a yellow phosphor.
- the LEDs of LED array 102 can provide light having many different wavelength values, such as those mentioned above.
- the LEDs of LED array 102 can be provided by many different manufacturers, such as Cree, Inc. of Durham, N.C. and Nichia Corporation of Tokyo, Japan. In this particular embodiment, however, the LEDs of LED array 102 are provided by Philips Lumileds Lighting Company and are referred to as Luxeon-III light emitting diodes.
- power supply 108 provides power signal S Power to LED controller 130 through power terminal 108 a .
- LED controller 130 selectively controls the operation of the LEDs of LED array 102 in response to an indication from inputs 110 and/or 111 , as will be discussed in more detail below.
- LED controller 130 selectively controls the operation of the LEDs of LED array 102 by controlling which types of LEDs are activated and deactivated. As mentioned above, activated LEDs emit light, and deactivated LEDs do not emit light. In this way, LED array 102 is capable of selectively emitting light of different wavelength ranges.
- LED array 102 includes a first LED which emits red light and a second LED which emits blue light. In this embodiment, LED array 102 can provide red light, blue light and a mixture of red and blue light in response to adjusting inputs 110 and/or 111 .
- LED array 102 includes a first LED which emits violet light and a second LED which emits red light.
- LED array 102 can provide violet light, red light and a mixture of violet and red light in response to adjusting inputs 110 and/or 111 .
- LED array 102 includes a first LED which emits violet light and a second LED which emits blue light. In this embodiment, LED array 102 can provide violet light, blue light and a mixture of violet and blue light in response to adjusting inputs 111 and/or 110 .
- FIG. 1 b is a more detailed block diagram of lighting system 100 a
- FIG. 1 c is a more detailed front view of one embodiment of LED array 102
- LED controller 130 includes an LED sub-controller 131 , which is operatively coupled to inputs 110 and 111 , as well as to LED array 102 .
- LED sub-controller 131 includes LED driver circuits 140 and 141
- LED array 102 includes LED sub-arrays 120 and 121 .
- Input 110 is operatively coupled to LED sub-array 120 through LED driver circuit 140
- input 111 is operatively coupled to LED sub-array 121 through LED driver circuit 141 . In this way, inputs 110 and 111 are operatively coupled to LED array 102 through LED controller 130 .
- LED array 102 includes an LED array support structure 106 a which carries LED sub-arrays 120 and 121 .
- LED sub-array 120 includes one or more LEDs of the same type.
- LED sub-array 121 includes one or more LEDs of the same type.
- the LEDs of LED sub-array 120 are denoted as LEDs 120 a
- the LEDs of LED sub-array 121 are denoted as LEDs 121 a .
- LEDs 120 a is capable of emitting blue light 162
- LEDs 121 a is capable of emitting red light 166 .
- LED array 102 includes one or more LED sub-arrays. However, two LED sub-arrays are shown in FIG. 1 c for simplicity and ease of discussion. An embodiment in which LED array 102 includes five LED sub-arrays will be discussed in more detail below.
- power supply 108 ( FIG. 1 a ) provides power signal S Power to LED driver circuits 140 and 141 through power terminal 108 a ( FIG. 1 a ).
- Input 110 provides an input signal S Input1 to LED driver circuit 140 and, in response, LED driver circuit 140 provides an output signal S Output1 to LED sub-array 120 .
- input 111 provides an input signal S Input2 to LED driver circuit 141 and, in response, LED driver circuit 141 provides an output signal S Output2 to LED sub-array 121 .
- input 110 operates as a switch, which is repeatably moveable between active and deactive conditions.
- input 110 is activated so that input signal S Input2 provides an indication to LED driver circuit 140 that it is desirable to activate the LEDs of LED sub-array 120 .
- LED driver circuit 140 provides output signal S Output1 to LED sub-array 120 , and LEDs 120 a are activated so they emit light.
- input 110 is deactivated so that input signal S Input1 provides an indication to LED driver circuit 140 that it is desirable to deactivate the LEDs of LED sub-array 120 .
- LED driver circuit 140 provides output signal S Output1 to LED sub-array 120 , and LEDs 120 a are deactivated so they do not emit blue light 162 .
- input 111 operates as a switch, which is repeatably moveable between active and deactive conditions.
- input 111 is activated so that input signal S Input2 provides an indication to LED driver circuit 141 that it is desirable to activate the LEDs of LED sub-array 121 .
- LED driver circuit 141 provides output signal S Output2 to LED sub-array 121 , and LEDs 121 a are activated so they emit red light 166 .
- input 111 is deactivated so that input signal S Input2 provides an indication to LED driver circuit 141 that it is desirable to deactivate the LEDs of LED sub-array 121 .
- LED driver circuit 141 provides output signal S Output2 to LED sub-array 121 , and LEDs 121 a are deactivated so they do not emit red light 166 . In this way, LED array 102 is capable of selectively emitting light of different wavelength ranges.
- FIG. 2 a is a schematic diagram of one embodiment of input 110 operatively coupled to LED sub-array 120 through LED driver circuit 140 , wherein input 110 operates as a potentiometer.
- input 110 includes a potentiometer 137 a , which is connected between power terminal 108 a and a current return 136 .
- LED driver circuit 140 includes an LED driver chip 150 , which is embodied as an LT3477EFE chip manufactured by Linear Technology, Inc. of Milpitas, Calif.
- the LT3477EFE chip is connected to electrical components, such as a resistor, inductor, capacitor and a Schottky diode, so that it operates as an LED driver.
- Another chip that can be used is the LM3409 HV chip manufactured by National Semiconductors and Texas Instruments. More information regarding the LM3409 HV chip, and how it is connected to the electrical components to operate as an LED driver, can be found in a corresponding Data Sheet provided by National Semiconductors and Texas Instruments.
- power terminal 108 a is connected to terminals 1 and 13 of the LT3477EFE chip, and the output of the potentiometer is connected to terminal 10 so that terminal 10 receives input signal S Input1 .
- Terminal 14 of the LT3477EFE chip provides output signal S Output1 to LED sub-array 120 .
- terminal 14 of the LT3477EFE chip provides output signal S Output1 to LED 120 a.
- the power of input signal S Input1 is adjustable in response to adjusting potentiometer 137 a .
- the power of input signal S Input1 is increased in response to adjusting potentiometer 137 a .
- LED driver circuit chip 150 increases the power of output signal S Output1 in response to the power of input signal S Input1 being increased by potentiometer 137 a .
- the intensity of blue light 162 emitted by LED 120 a increases in response to the amount of power of output signal S Output1 being increased by LED driver circuit chip 150 .
- the power of input signal S Input1 is decreased in response to adjusting potentiometer 137 a .
- LED driver circuit chip 150 decreases the power of output signal S Output1 in response to the power of input signal S Input1 being decreased by potentiometer 137 a .
- the intensity of blue light 162 emitted by LED 120 a decreases in response to the amount of power of output signal S Output1 being decreased by LED driver circuit chip 150 .
- FIG. 2 b is a schematic diagram of one embodiment of input 111 operatively coupled to LED sub-array 121 through LED driver circuit 141 , wherein input 111 operates as a potentiometer.
- input 111 is embodied as a potentiometer 137 b , which is connected between power terminal 108 a and current return 136 .
- LED driver circuit 141 includes an LED driver chip 151 , which is embodied as the LT3477EFE chip described in more detail above.
- the LT3477EFE chip of LED driver chip 151 is connected to electrical components, such as a resistor, inductor, capacitor and a Schottky diode, so that it operates as an LED driver.
- power terminal 108 a is connected to terminals 1 and 13 of the LT3477EFE chip, and the output of the potentiometer is connected to terminal 10 so that terminal 10 receives input signal S Input2 .
- Terminal 14 of the LT3477EFE chip provides output signal S Output2 to LED sub-array 121 .
- terminal 14 of the LT3477EFE chip provides output signal S Output2 to LED 121 a.
- the power of input signal S Input2 is adjustable in response to adjusting potentiometer 137 b .
- the power of input signal S Input2 is increased in response to adjusting potentiometer 137 b .
- LED driver circuit chip 151 increases the power of output signal S Output2 in response to the power of input signal S Input2 being increased by potentiometer 137 b .
- the intensity of red light 166 emitted by LED 121 a increases in response to the amount of power of output signal S Output2 being increased by LED driver circuit chip 151 .
- the power of input signal S Input2 is decreased in response to adjusting potentiometer 137 b .
- LED driver circuit chip 151 decreases the power of output signal S Output2 in response to the power of input signal S Input2 being decreased by potentiometer 137 b .
- the intensity of red light 166 emitted by LED 121 a decreases in response to the amount of power of output signal S Output2 being decreased by LED driver circuit chip 151 .
- FIG. 3 a is a graph of a wavelength spectrum 180 of light provided by lighting system 100 a .
- wavelength spectrum 180 corresponds to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm).
- the intensity of light is denoted as I 1 , I 2 , I 3 and I 4 , wherein I 1 is less than I 2 , I 2 is less than I 3 and I 3 is less than I 4 .
- the intensity of light can be determined in many different ways, such as by using a spectrometer.
- LED 120 a is an LED that emits blue light 162 when activated.
- blue light 162 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 180 a between about 450 nm and 495 nm.
- blue light 162 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 180 a between about 475 nm and 500 nm.
- blue light 162 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 180 a between about 450 nm and 475 nm. It should be noted that the intensity of blue light 162 of wavelength spectrum 180 can be adjusted in many different ways, several of which will be discussed in more detail presently.
- input 110 operates as a switch which is repeatably moveable between activated and deactivated conditions.
- the intensity of blue light 162 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjustable in response to adjusting the number of LEDs 120 a .
- the intensity of blue light 162 decreases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 180 b , in response to decreasing the number of LEDs 120 a of LED sub-array 120 .
- the intensity of blue light 162 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 180 c , in response to increasing the number of LEDs 120 a of LED sub-array 120 .
- input 110 includes potentiometer 137 a .
- potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 are decreased, as discussed above with FIG. 2 a .
- the intensity of blue light 162 decreases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 180 b , in response to decreasing the power of input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 with potentiometer 137 a.
- potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 are increased, as discussed above with FIG. 2 a .
- the intensity of blue light 162 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 180 c , in response to increasing the power of input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 with potentiometer 137 a.
- FIG. 3 b is a graph of a wavelength spectrum 181 of light provided by lighting system 100 a .
- wavelength spectrum 181 corresponds to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above with wavelength spectrum 180 .
- LED driver circuit 141 provides signal S Output1 to LED sub-array 121 , wherein LED sub-array 121 includes LED 121 a .
- LED 121 a is an LED that emits red light 166 when activated.
- red light 166 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 181 a between about 650 nm and 750 nm.
- red light 166 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 181 a between about 620 nm and 670 nm.
- red light 166 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 181 a between about 700 nm and 750 nm. It should be noted that the intensity of red light 166 of wavelength spectrum 181 can be adjusted in many different ways, several of which will be discussed in more detail presently.
- input 111 operates as a switch which is repeatably moveable between activated and deactivated conditions.
- the intensity of red light 166 provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjustable in response to adjusting the number of LEDs 121 a .
- the intensity of red light 166 decreases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 181 b , in response to decreasing the number of LEDs 121 a of LED sub-array 121 .
- the intensity of red light 166 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 181 c , in response to increasing the number of LEDs 121 a of LED sub-array 121 .
- input 111 includes potentiometer 137 b .
- potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 are decreased, as discussed above with FIG. 2 b .
- the intensity of red light 166 decreases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 181 b , in response to decreasing the power of input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 with potentiometer 137 b.
- potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 are increased, as discussed above with FIG. 2 b .
- the intensity of red light 166 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 181 c , in response to increasing the power of input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 with potentiometer 137 b.
- lighting system 100 a can provide color mixing when LED array 102 includes different types of LEDs.
- An example of a wavelength spectrum with color mixing will be discussed in more detail presently.
- FIG. 3 c is a graph of a wavelength spectrum 182 of light provided by lighting system 100 a , wherein wavelength spectrum 182 includes color mixing.
- wavelength spectrum 182 corresponds to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above with wavelength spectrum 180 .
- blue light 162 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 180 a between about 450 nm and 500 nm
- red light 166 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 181 a between about 650 nm and 750 nm.
- Lighting system 100 a can provide wavelength spectrum 182 with color mixing in many different ways.
- inputs 110 and 111 operate as switches, which are repeatably moveable between activated and deactivated conditions.
- the intensity of blue light 162 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjustable in response to adjusting the number of LEDs 120 a .
- the intensity of blue light 162 decreases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 180 b , in response to decreasing the number of LEDs 120 a of LED sub-array 120 .
- the intensity of blue light 162 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 180 c , in response to increasing the number of LEDs 120 a of LED sub-array 120 .
- the intensity of red light 166 provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjustable in response to adjusting the number of LEDs 121 a .
- the intensity of red light 166 decreases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 181 b , in response to decreasing the number of LEDs 121 a of LED sub-array 121 .
- the intensity of red light 166 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 181 c , in response to increasing the number of LEDs 121 a of LED sub-array 121 .
- the relative intensities of blue light 162 and red light 166 provided by lighting system 100 a can be adjusted relative to each other in response to adjusting the number of LEDs 120 a of LED sub-array 120 and the number of LEDs 121 a of LED sub-array 121 .
- the relative intensities of blue light 162 and red light 166 can be adjusted in many different ways.
- the number of LEDs 120 a can be increased relative to the number of LEDs 121 a , so that wavelength spectrum 180 c and wavelength spectrum 181 b are provided by LED sub-arrays 120 and 121 , respectively.
- the amount of blue light 162 and red light 166 provided by lighting system 100 a is increased relative to the amount of red light 166 .
- the number of LEDs 121 a can be decreased relative to the number of LEDs 120 a , so that wavelength spectrum 180 c and wavelength spectrum 181 b are provided by LED sub-arrays 120 and 121 , respectively.
- the amount of blue light 162 and red light 166 provided by lighting system 100 a is decreased relative to the amount of red light 166 .
- lighting system 100 a is capable of providing a desired mixture of blue and red light.
- inputs 110 and 111 include potentiometers 136 a and 136 b , respectively.
- potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 are decreased, as discussed above with FIG. 2 a .
- the intensity of blue light 162 decreases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 180 b , in response to decreasing the power of input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 with potentiometer 137 a.
- potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 are increased, as discussed above with FIG. 2 a .
- the intensity of blue light 162 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 180 c , in response to increasing the power of input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 with potentiometer 137 a.
- potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 are decreased, as discussed above with FIG. 2 b .
- the intensity of red light 166 decreases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 181 b , in response to decreasing the power of input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 with potentiometer 137 b.
- potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 are increased, as discussed above with FIG. 2 b .
- the intensity of red light 166 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 181 c , in response to increasing the power of input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 with potentiometer 137 b.
- the relative intensities of blue light 162 and red light 166 can be adjusted relative to each other in response to adjusting potentiometers 136 a and/or 136 b .
- the relative intensities of blue light 162 and red light 166 can be adjusted in many different ways by adjusting potentiometers 136 a and 136 b.
- potentiometer 137 a is adjusted, as described above, so that input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 have more power, and wavelength spectrum 180 c is provided by LED sub-array 120 .
- potentiometer 137 b is adjusted, as described above, so that input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 have less power, and wavelength spectrum 181 b is provided by LED sub-array 121 . In this way, lighting system 100 a provides more blue light 162 and less red light 166 .
- the intensity of red light 166 is about one order of magnitude greater than the intensity of blue light 162 . In another situation, the intensity of red light 166 is about ten to about fifteen times greater than the intensity of blue light 162 . In another situation, the intensity of red light 166 is about eight to thirteen times greater than the intensity of blue light 162 . In general, the intensity of red light 166 is a desired amount greater than the intensity of blue light 162 .
- the intensity of blue light 162 is about one order of magnitude greater than the intensity of red light 166 . In another situation, the intensity of blue light 162 is about ten to about fifteen times greater than the intensity of red light 166 . In another situation, the intensity of blue light 162 is about eight to thirteen times greater than the intensity of red light 166 . In general, the intensity of blue light 162 is a desired amount greater than the intensity of red light 166 .
- potentiometer 137 a is adjusted, as described above, so that input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 have less power, and wavelength spectrum 180 b is provided by LED sub-array 120 . Further, potentiometer 137 b is adjusted, as described above, so that input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 have more power, and wavelength spectrum 181 c is provided by LED sub-array 121 . In this way, lighting system 100 a provides less blue light 162 and more red light 166 . It should be noted that the desired mixture of light provided by lighting system 100 a can be chosen to correspond to an action spectrum of a physiological activity of a plant, as will be discussed in more detail presently.
- FIGS. 4 a and 4 b are graphs of wavelength spectrum 183 and 184 , respectively, of light provided by lighting system 100 a .
- Action spectrum corresponding to chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b are also shown in FIGS. 4 a and 4 b , respectively.
- wavelength spectrums 183 and 184 correspond to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above with wavelength spectrum 180 .
- an action spectrum is the rate of a physiological activity versus the wavelength of light received by a plant.
- An action spectrum illustrates which wavelengths of light are effective in driving the physiological activity, wherein the physiological activity corresponds to a chemical reaction of the plant.
- the physiological activity of the plant can be of many different types, such as the chemical reactions associated with photosynthesis and cellular respiration.
- the wavelengths of light that are effective in driving the physiological activity of the plant depends on the types of pigments the plant includes.
- Plants can include many different types of pigments, such as chlorophylls, carotenoids and phycobilins.
- chlorophylls such as chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b.
- carotenoids such as xanthophylls and carotenes.
- carotenes such as ⁇ -carotene and ⁇ -carotene.
- phycobilins such as pelargonidin, phycocyanin, phycoerythrin, phytochrome and anthocyanins, among others. It should also be noted that the action spectrum of chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b is similar to the action spectrum of other chemicals, such as those associated with leaf extract.
- the red and blue-violet spectrums of light are effective in driving the physiological activity of photosynthesis of chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b.
- the action spectrum corresponding to chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b are non-zero in a range of wavelengths that include red and blue-violet light.
- the rate of photosynthesis of chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b increases in response to receiving more red and blue-violet light.
- the rate of photosynthesis of chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b decreases in response to receiving less red and blue-violet light.
- LED 120 a is an LED that emits violet light 161 when activated.
- violet light 161 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 183 a between about 400 nm and 450 nm.
- violet light 161 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 183 a between about 380 nm and 425 nm.
- violet light 161 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 183 a between about 425 nm and 450 nm.
- LED 121 a is an LED that emits red light 166 when activated.
- red light 166 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 183 b between about 650 nm and 675 nm.
- lighting system 100 a is capable of providing a wavelength spectrum which corresponds to the action spectrum of chlorophyll a when lighting system 100 a includes LEDs capable of emitting violet light 161 and red light 166 .
- the intensity of the light provided by the different types of LEDs of lighting system 100 a are adjustable relative to each other.
- inputs 110 and 111 correspond to switches so that the intensity of violet light 161 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting the number of LEDs 120 a .
- the intensity of red light 166 provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting the number of LEDs 121 a.
- input 110 includes potentiometer 137 a , so that the intensity of violet light 161 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting potentiometer 137 a , as described in more detail above.
- input 111 includes potentiometer 137 b , so that the intensity of red light 166 provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting potentiometer 137 b , as described in more detail above.
- the relative intensities of violet light 161 and red light 166 can be adjusted relative to each other in response to adjusting potentiometers 136 a and 136 b . In some situations, the intensity of red light 166 is about ten to about fifteen times greater than the intensity of violet light 161 .
- LED 120 a is an LED that emits blue-violet light 170 when activated.
- blue-violet light 170 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 184 a between about 400 nm and 475 nm.
- blue-violet light 170 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 184 a between about 450 nm and 500 nm.
- LED 121 a is an LED that emits red light 166 when activated.
- red light 166 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 184 b between about 625 nm and 675 nm.
- lighting system 100 a is capable of providing a wavelength spectrum which corresponds to the action spectrum of chlorophyll b when lighting system 100 a includes LEDs capable of emitting blue-violet light 170 and red light 166 .
- the intensity of the light provided by the different types of LEDs of lighting system 100 a are adjustable relative to each other.
- inputs 110 and 111 correspond to switches so that the intensity of blue-violet light 170 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting the number of LEDs 120 a .
- the intensity of red light 166 provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting the number of LEDs 121 a.
- input 110 includes potentiometer 137 a , so that the intensity of blue-violet light 170 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting potentiometer 137 a , as described in more detail above.
- input 111 includes potentiometer 137 b , so that the intensity of red light 166 provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting potentiometer 137 b , as described in more detail above. It should be noted that the relative intensities of blue-violet light 170 and red light 166 can be adjusted relative to each other in response to adjusting potentiometers 136 a and 136 b.
- lighting system 100 a In general, the types of LEDs of lighting system 100 a are chosen so that lighting system 100 a can provide a wavelength spectrum which drives the physiological activity of a desired type of plant. Hence, lighting system 100 a can provide wavelength spectra useful for plants which have action spectrum different from chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b, as will be discussed in more detail presently.
- FIGS. 4 c and 4 d are graphs of wavelength spectrum 185 and 186 , respectively, of light provided by lighting system 100 a .
- Action spectrum corresponding to ⁇ -carotene are also shown in FIGS. 4 c and 4 d .
- FIGS. 4 e and 4 f are graphs of wavelength spectrum 187 and 188 , respectively, of light provided by lighting system 100 a .
- Action spectrum corresponding to ⁇ -carotene are also shown in FIGS. 4 e and 4 f .
- the wavelength spectrums correspond to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above with wavelength spectrum 180 .
- the physiological activity of ⁇ -carotene and ⁇ -carotene is effectively driven by wavelengths of blue-violet light.
- the action spectrum corresponding to ⁇ -carotene and ⁇ -carotene are non-zero in a range of wavelengths that include blue and violet light.
- the rate of physiological activity of ⁇ -carotene and ⁇ -carotene increases in response to receiving more blue-violet light.
- the rate of physiological activity of ⁇ -carotene and ⁇ -carotene decreases in response to receiving less blue-violet light.
- LED driver circuit 140 provides signal S Output1 to LED sub-array 120 , wherein LED sub-array 120 includes LED 120 a .
- LED 120 a is an LED that emits violet light 161 when activated.
- violet light 161 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 185 a between about 400 nm and 450 nm.
- LED 121 a is an LED that emits blue light 162 when activated.
- blue light 162 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 185 b between about 425 nm and 475 nm.
- lighting system 100 a is capable of providing a wavelength spectrum which corresponds to the action spectrum of ⁇ -carotene when lighting system 100 a includes LEDs capable of emitting violet light 161 and blue light 162 .
- the intensity of the light provided by the different types of LEDs of lighting system 100 a are adjustable relative to each other.
- inputs 110 and 111 correspond to switches so that the intensity of violet light 161 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting the number of LEDs 120 a .
- the intensity of blue light 162 provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting the number of LEDs 121 a.
- input 110 includes potentiometer 137 a , so that the intensity of violet light 161 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting potentiometer 137 a , as described in more detail above.
- input 111 includes potentiometer 137 b , so that the intensity of blue light 162 provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting potentiometer 137 b , as described in more detail above.
- the relative intensities of violet light 161 and blue light 162 can be adjusted relative to each other in response to adjusting potentiometers 136 a and 136 b .
- physiological activity of ⁇ -carotene can be driven in response to the light from one type of LED, as will be discussed in more detail presently.
- LED 120 a is an LED that emits blue-violet light 170 when activated.
- blue-violet light 170 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 186 a between about 400 nm and 500 nm. In this way, LED 120 a provides blue-violet light 170 which has a broader spectrum than the spectrum of violet light 161 FIG. 4 c .
- LED 120 a provides blue-violet light 170 which has a broader spectrum than the spectrum of blue light 162 FIG. 4 c .
- the wavelength distribution of light provided by an LED can be made broader and narrower in many different ways, such as by choosing the semiconductor material composition of the LED.
- input 111 provides input signal S Input2 to LED driver circuit 141
- LED driver circuit 141 provides output signal S Output2 to LED sub-array 121 , wherein LED sub-array 121 includes LED 121 a .
- LED 121 a is deactivated in response to receiving output signal S Output2 . In this way, the physiological activity of ⁇ -carotene is driven in response to the light from one type of LED.
- inputs 110 and 111 correspond to switches so that the intensity of blue-violet light 170 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting the number of LEDs 120 a . Further, the intensity of blue light 162 provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted by deactivating LEDs 121 a.
- input 110 includes potentiometer 137 a , so that the intensity of blue-violet light 170 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting potentiometer 137 a , as described in more detail above.
- input 111 includes potentiometer 137 b , so that the intensity of blue light 162 provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting potentiometer 137 b so that output signal S Output2 deactivates LEDs 121 a.
- LED driver circuit 140 provides signal S Output1 to LED sub-array 120 , wherein LED sub-array 120 includes LED 120 a .
- LED 120 a is an LED that emits blue-violet light 170 when activated.
- blue-violet light 170 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 187 a between about 425 nm and 475 nm.
- LED 121 a is an LED that emits blue light 162 when activated.
- blue light 162 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 187 b between about 425 nm and 475 nm.
- lighting system 100 a is capable of providing a wavelength spectrum which corresponds to the action spectrum of ⁇ -carotene when lighting system 100 a includes LEDs capable of emitting blue-violet light 170 and blue light 162 .
- the intensity of the light provided by the different types of LEDs of lighting system 100 a are adjustable relative to each other.
- inputs 110 and 111 correspond to switches so that the intensity of blue-violet light 170 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting the number of LEDs 120 a .
- the intensity of blue light 162 provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting the number of LEDs 121 a.
- input 110 includes potentiometer 137 a , so that the intensity of blue-violet light 170 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting potentiometer 137 a , as described in more detail above.
- input 111 includes potentiometer 137 b , so that the intensity of blue light 162 provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting potentiometer 137 b , as described in more detail above.
- the relative intensities of blue-violet light 170 and blue light 162 can be adjusted relative to each other in response to adjusting potentiometers 136 a and 136 b .
- physiological activity of ⁇ -carotene can be driven in response to the light from one type of LED, as will be discussed in more detail presently.
- LED 120 a is an LED that emits blue-violet light 170 when activated.
- blue-violet light 170 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 188 a between about 400 nm and 500 nm. In this way, LED 120 a provides blue-violet light 170 which has a broader spectrum than the spectrum of violet light 161 FIG. 4 e .
- LED 120 a provides blue-violet light 170 which has a broader spectrum than the spectrum of blue light 162 FIG. 4 e .
- the wavelength distribution of light provided by an LED can be made broader and narrower in many different ways, such as by choosing the semiconductor material composition of the LED.
- input 111 provides input signal S Input2 to LED driver circuit 141
- LED driver circuit 141 provides output signal S Output2 to LED sub-array 121 , wherein LED sub-array 121 includes LED 121 a .
- LED 121 a is deactivated in response to receiving output signal S Output2 . In this way, the physiological activity of ⁇ -carotene is driven in response to the light from one type of LED.
- inputs 110 and 111 correspond to switches so that the intensity of blue-violet light 170 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting the number of LEDs 120 a . Further, the intensity of blue light 162 provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted by deactivating LEDs 121 a.
- input 110 includes potentiometer 137 a , so that the intensity of blue-violet light 170 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting potentiometer 137 a , as described in more detail above.
- input 111 includes potentiometer 137 b , so that the intensity of light provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting potentiometer 137 b so that output signal S Output2 deactivates LEDs 121 a.
- FIG. 4 g is a graph of wavelength spectrum 189 of light provided by lighting system 100 a .
- Action spectrum corresponding to pelargonin (Perlargonidin-3, 5-diglucoside) is also shown in FIG. 4 g .
- wavelength spectrum 189 corresponds to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above with wavelength spectrum 180 .
- LED 120 a is an LED that emits blue-green light 171 when activated.
- blue-green light 171 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 189 a between about 450 nm and 550 nm.
- LED 120 a provides blue-green light 171 which has a broader spectrum than the spectrum of blue light 162 FIG. 4 e .
- the wavelength distribution of light provided by an LED can be made broader and narrower in many different ways, such as by choosing the semiconductor material composition of the LED.
- input 111 provides input signal S Input2 to LED driver circuit 141
- LED driver circuit 141 provides output signal S Output2 to LED sub-array 121 , wherein LED sub-array 121 includes LED 121 a .
- LED 121 a is deactivated in response to receiving output signal S Output2 . In this way, the physiological activity of pelargonin is driven in response to the light from one type of LED.
- inputs 110 and 111 correspond to switches so that the intensity of blue-green light 171 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting the number of LEDs 120 a . Further, the intensity of blue-green light 171 provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted by deactivating LEDs 121 a.
- input 110 includes potentiometer 137 a , so that the intensity of light provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting potentiometer 137 a , as described in more detail above.
- input 111 includes potentiometer 137 b , so that the intensity of light provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting potentiometer 137 b so that output signal S Output2 deactivates LEDs 121 a.
- wavelength spectrum 189 corresponds to the wavelength spectra of two different types of LEDs, as discussed above with FIG. 4 e.
- FIG. 4 h is a graph of wavelength spectrum 190 of light provided by lighting system 100 a .
- Action spectrum corresponding to phycocyanin is also shown in FIG. 4 h .
- wavelength spectrum 190 corresponds to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above with wavelength spectrum 180 .
- LED driver circuit 140 provides signal S Output1 to LED sub-array 120 , wherein LED sub-array 120 includes LED 120 a .
- LED 120 a is an LED that emits yellow-orange light 172 when activated.
- yellow-orange light 172 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 189 a between about 575 nm and 625 nm.
- input 111 provides input signal S Input2 to LED driver circuit 141
- LED driver circuit 141 provides output signal S Output2 to LED sub-array 121 , wherein LED sub-array 121 includes LED 121 a .
- LED 121 a is deactivated in response to receiving output signal S Output2 . In this way, the physiological activity of pelargonin is driven in response to the light from one type of LED.
- inputs 110 and 111 correspond to switches so that the intensity of yellow-orange light 172 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting the number of LEDs 120 a . Further, the intensity of yellow-orange light 172 provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted by deactivating LEDs 121 a.
- input 110 includes potentiometer 137 a , so that the intensity of yellow-orange light 172 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting potentiometer 137 a , as described in more detail above.
- input 111 includes potentiometer 137 b , so that the intensity of light provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting potentiometer 137 b so that output signal S Output2 deactivates LEDs 121 a .
- the broadness of the wavelength spectra of yellow-orange light 172 can be chosen by choosing the semiconductor material of LEDs 120 a , as discussed above with FIG. 4 f.
- FIG. 4 i is a graph of wavelength spectrum 191 of light provided by lighting system 100 a .
- Action spectrum corresponding to phycoerythrin is also shown in FIG. 4 i .
- wavelength spectrum 191 corresponds to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above with wavelength spectrum 180 .
- LED driver circuit 140 provides signal S Output1 to LED sub-array 120 , wherein LED sub-array 120 includes LED 120 a .
- LED 120 a is an LED that emits blue-green light 171 when activated.
- blue-green light 171 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 181 a between about 475 nm and 550 nm.
- input 111 provides input signal S Input2 to LED driver circuit 141
- LED driver circuit 141 provides output signal S Output2 to LED sub-array 121
- LED sub-array 121 includes LED 121 a
- LED 121 a emits green light 163 when activated.
- green light 163 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 191 b between about 500 nm and 575 nm. In this way, the physiological activity of phycoerythrin is driven in response to the light from two types of LEDs.
- inputs 110 and 111 correspond to switches so that the intensity of blue-green light 171 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting the number of LEDs 120 a . Further, the intensity of green light 163 provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting the number of LEDs 121 a.
- input 110 includes potentiometer 137 a , so that the intensity of blue-green light 171 provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting potentiometer 137 a , as described in more detail above.
- input 111 includes potentiometer 137 b , so that the intensity of green light 163 provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting potentiometer 137 b , as described in more detail above.
- the broadness of the wavelength spectra of blue-green light 171 and/or green light 163 can be chosen by choosing the semiconductor material of LEDs 120 a and 121 a , respectively, as discussed in more detail above.
- the lighting system can include one or more LED sub-arrays, which include different types of LEDs.
- the type of LEDs of the sub-arrays can be chosen so that the lighting system can provide a desired wavelength spectrum between UV light and IR light, which is useful to drive the physiological activity of a plant.
- adjusting the intensity of red and blue light is believed to affect the physiological activity of the plant.
- One useful light spectrum ratio is to have about ninety-five percent (95%) red light and about five percent (5%) blue light. It is believed that the morphology of the plant changes in response to changing the ratio of red light and blue light. For example, the plant grows to be more compact in response to reducing the percentage of red light and increasing the percentage of blue light.
- PGR's plant growth regulators
- FIGS. 5 a and 5 b are bottom and top perspective views, respectively, of a lighting system 100 b .
- lighting system 100 b includes inputs 110 , 111 , 112 , 113 and 114 ( FIG. 5 b ) operatively coupled to LED arrays 102 and 103 through LED controller 130 (not shown).
- LED arrays 102 and 103 each include LED sub-arrays connected to inputs 110 - 114 .
- the LED sub-arrays of LED arrays 102 and 103 each include a plurality of LEDs, as will be discussed in more detail with FIGS. 5 f and 5 g .
- the LEDs of arrays 102 and 103 can be of many different types, such as those mentioned above.
- LED arrays 102 and 103 are spaced apart from each other by a distance L ( FIG. 5 b ) so that lighting system 100 b provides a desired intensity of light away from LED arrays 102 and 103 .
- LED arrays 102 and 103 are spaced apart from each other by distance L so that lighting system 100 b can be more effectively cooled, as will be discussed in more detail below.
- LED arrays 102 and 103 include the same number of LEDs.
- LED arrays 102 and 103 can include different numbers of LEDs.
- LED array 102 includes twenty five LEDs and LED array 103 includes twenty six LEDs.
- lighting system 100 b includes a lighting system housing 101 which houses LED arrays 102 and 103 , and extends between housing sides 116 a and 116 b .
- FIGS. 5 c and 5 d are top and back perspective views of lighting system 100 b with and without lighting system housing 101 , respectively.
- FIG. 5 e is a front perspective view of lighting system 100 b without lighting system housing 101 .
- lighting system housing 101 includes opposed walls 101 a and 101 b .
- Lighting system housing 101 includes an angled wall 101 g , which extends from an edge of wall 101 a .
- Lighting system 101 includes an angled wall 101 b which extends from an edge of angled wall 101 g .
- Lighting system 101 includes an angled wall 101 e which extends from an edge of wall 101 f .
- Lighting system 101 includes an angled wall 101 d which extends from an edge of angled wall 101 e .
- Lighting system 101 includes a back wall 101 c which extends from edges of angled walls 101 b and 101 d.
- lighting system 100 b includes an on/off switch 109 operatively coupled with LED controller 130 .
- On/off switch 109 is for turning LED controller 130 on and off.
- on/off switch 109 extends through angled wall 101 e , as shown in FIG. 5 b.
- lighting system 100 b includes fans 104 a and 104 b which provide cooling.
- fans 104 a and 104 b can cool LED controller 130 (not shown) and LED arrays 102 and 103 .
- Fans 104 a and 104 b can be positioned at many different locations of lighting system 100 b . In this embodiment, fans 104 a and 104 b are positioned between LED arrays 102 and 103 .
- lighting system 100 includes a heatsinks 105 a and 105 b which provide cooling for LED arrays 102 and 103 , respectively.
- Heatsinks 105 a and 105 b also provide cooling for LED controller 130 .
- LED arrays 102 and 103 are spaced apart from each other by distance L, which allows LED arrays 102 and 103 to be more effectively cooled by fans 104 a and 104 b , and corresponding heatsinks 105 a and 105 b.
- FIG. 5 f is a front view of LED array 102 of lighting system 100 b , wherein LED array 102 includes LED sub-arrays 120 , 121 , 122 , 123 and 124 carried by LED array support structure 106 a .
- LED array 102 generally includes one or more LED sub-arrays, but it includes five LED sub-arrays in this embodiment for illustrative purposes. An embodiment in which LED array 102 includes two LED sub-arrays is discussed in more detail above.
- LED sub-arrays 120 , 121 , 122 , 123 and 124 each include five LEDs for illustrative purposes so that LED array 102 includes twenty five LEDs.
- LED array 102 includes two or more sub-arrays LEDs, and the LED sub-arrays generally include one or more LEDs.
- LED sub-array 120 includes LEDs 120 a , 120 b , 120 c , 120 d and 120 e
- LED sub-array 121 includes LEDs 121 a , 121 b , 121 c , 121 d and 121 e
- LED sub-array 122 includes LEDs 122 a , 122 b , 122 c , 122 d and 122 e
- LED sub-array 123 includes LEDs 123 a , 123 b , 123 c , 123 d and 123 e .
- LED sub-array 124 includes LEDs 124 a , 124 b , 124 c , 124 d and 124 e .
- the light emitting diodes included with LED array 102 can emit many different colors of light in response to output signals received from LED controller 130 , as will be discussed in more detail below with FIGS. 9 a - 9 f.
- FIG. 5 g is a front view of LED array 103 of lighting system 100 b , wherein LED array 103 includes LED sub-arrays 125 , 126 , 127 , 128 and 129 carried by LED array support structure 106 b .
- LED array 103 generally includes one or more LED sub-arrays, but it includes five LED sub-arrays in this embodiment for illustrative purposes. An embodiment in which LED array 103 includes two LED sub-arrays is discussed in more detail above.
- LED sub-arrays 125 , 126 , 127 , 128 and 129 each include five LEDs for illustrative purposes so that LED array 103 includes twenty five LEDs.
- LED array 103 includes two or more LEDs, and LED sub-arrays generally include one or more LEDs.
- LED sub-array 125 includes LEDs 125 a , 125 b , 125 c , 125 d and 125 e
- LED sub-array 126 includes LEDs 126 a , 126 b , 126 c , 126 d and 126 e
- LED sub-array 127 includes LEDs 127 a , 127 b , 127 c , 127 d and 127 e
- LED sub-array 128 includes LEDs 128 a , 128 b , 128 c , 128 d and 128 e .
- LED sub-array 129 includes LEDs 129 a , 129 b , 129 c , 129 d and 129 e .
- the light emitting diodes included with LED array 103 can emit many different colors of light in response to output signals received from LED controller 130 , as will be discussed in more detail below with FIGS. 9 a - 9 f.
- LED sub-arrays 120 and 125 include LEDs which are capable of emitting UV light 160 .
- LEDs 120 a - 120 e and LEDs 125 a - 125 e are capable of emitting UV light 160 .
- UV light 160 has a wavelength between about 300 and 380 nm.
- IR light 167 has a wavelength between about 350 and 380 nm.
- LED sub-arrays 121 and 126 include LEDs which are capable of emitting blue light 162 .
- LEDs 121 a - 121 e and LEDs 126 a - 126 e are capable of emitting blue light 162 .
- LED sub-arrays 122 and 127 include LEDs which are capable of emitting green light 163 .
- LEDs 122 a - 122 e and LEDs 127 a - 127 e are capable of emitting green light 163 .
- LED sub-arrays 123 and 128 include LEDs which are capable of emitting red light 166 .
- LEDs 123 a - 123 e and LEDs 128 a - 128 e are capable of emitting red light 166 .
- LED sub-arrays 124 and 129 include LEDs which are capable of emitting IR light 167 .
- LEDs 124 a - 124 e and LEDs 129 a - 129 e are capable of emitting IR light 167 .
- IR light 167 has a wavelength between about 750 and 825 nm. In other embodiments, IR light 167 has a wavelength between about 750 and 900 nm.
- FIGS. 6 a and 6 b are block diagram of lighting system 100 b , which includes inputs 110 - 114 operatively coupled to LED arrays 102 and 103 through LED controller 130 , wherein LED controller 130 includes LED sub-controllers 131 and 132 .
- LED sub-controller 131 is operatively coupled to inputs 110 , 111 , 112 , 113 and 114 , as well as to LED array 102 .
- LED sub-controller 131 includes LED driver circuits 140 , 141 , 142 , 143 and 144 operatively coupled to LED sub-arrays 120 , 121 , 122 , 123 and 124 , respectively.
- inputs 110 , 111 , 112 , 113 and 114 are operatively coupled with LED driver circuits 140 , 141 , 142 , 143 and 144 , respectively.
- input 110 provides input signal S Input1 to LED driver circuit 140 and, in response, LED driver circuit 140 provides output signal S Output1 to LED sub-array 120 .
- input 111 provides input signal S Input2 to LED driver circuit 141 and, in response, LED driver circuit 141 provides output signal S Output2 to LED sub-array 121 .
- Input 112 provides an input signal S Input3 to LED driver circuit 141 and, in response, LED driver circuit 141 provides an output signal S Output3 to LED sub-array 122 .
- Input 113 provides an input signal S Input4 to LED driver circuit 141 and, in response, LED driver circuit 141 provides an output signal S Output4 to LED sub-array 123 .
- Input 114 provides an input signal S Input5 to LED driver circuit 141 and, in response, LED driver circuit 141 provides an output signal S Output5 to LED sub-array 124 . In this way, inputs 110 - 114 are operatively coupled to LED array 102 through LED sub-controller 131 .
- LED sub-controller 132 is operatively coupled to inputs 110 , 111 , 112 , 113 and 114 , as well as to LED array 103 .
- LED sub-controller 132 includes LED driver circuits 145 , 146 , 147 , 148 and 149 operatively coupled to LED sub-arrays 125 , 126 , 127 , 128 and 129 , respectively.
- inputs 110 , 111 , 112 , 113 and 114 are operatively coupled with LED driver circuits 145 , 146 , 147 , 148 and 149 , respectively.
- input 110 provides input signal S Input1 to LED driver circuit 145 and, in response, LED driver circuit 145 provides output signal S Output1 to LED sub-array 125 .
- input 111 provides input signal S Input2 to LED driver circuit 146 and, in response, LED driver circuit 146 provides output signal S Output2 to LED sub-array 126 .
- Input 112 provides input signal S Input3 to LED driver circuit 147 and, in response, LED driver circuit 147 provides output signal S Output3 to LED sub-array 127 .
- Input 113 provides input signal S Input4 to LED driver circuit 148 and, in response, LED driver circuit 148 provides output signal S Output4 to LED sub-array 128 .
- Input 114 provides input signal S Input5 to LED driver circuit 149 and, in response, LED driver circuit 149 provides output signal S Output5 to LED sub-array 129 . In this way, inputs 110 - 114 are operatively coupled to LED array 103 through LED sub-controller 132 .
- inputs 110 - 114 each operate as a switch which is repeatably moveable between active and deactive conditions, as described in more detail above with FIGS. 1 a , 1 b and 1 c .
- inputs 110 - 114 include potentiometers, as will be discussed in more detail below.
- FIG. 7 a is a schematic diagram of input 110 operatively coupled to LED sub-array 120 through LED driver circuit 140 , wherein input 110 operates as a potentiometer.
- input 110 includes potentiometer 137 a , which is connected between power terminal 108 a and current return 136 .
- the output of potentiometer 137 a is connected to LED driver circuit 140 , which includes LED driver circuit chip 150 , so that LED driver circuit 140 receives input signal S Input1 .
- LED driver circuit chip 150 provides output signal S Output1 to LED sub-array 120 ( FIG. 6 a ) in response to receiving input signal S Input1 from input 110 .
- LED driver circuit chip 150 provides output signal S Output1 to LEDs 120 a - 120 e .
- LEDs 120 a - 120 e emit UV light 160 in response to being activated by output signal S Output1 . Further, LEDs 120 a - 120 e do not emit UV light 160 in response to being deactivated by output signal S Output1 .
- LED driver circuits and LED driver circuit chips are provided in more detail above with the discussion of FIGS. 1 a , 1 b and 1 c , as well as with the discussion of FIGS. 2 a and 2 b.
- FIG. 7 b is a schematic diagram of input 111 operatively coupled to LED sub-array 121 through LED driver circuit 141 , wherein input 111 operates as a potentiometer.
- input 111 includes potentiometer 137 b , which is connected between power terminal 108 a and current return 136 .
- the output of potentiometer 137 b is connected to LED driver circuit 141 , which includes LED driver circuit chip 151 , so that LED driver circuit 141 receives input signal S Input2 .
- LED driver circuit chip 151 provides output signal S Output2 to LED sub-array 121 ( FIG. 6 a ) in response to receiving input signal S Input2 from input 111 .
- LED driver circuit chip 151 provides output signal S Output2 to LEDs 121 a - 121 e .
- LEDs 121 a - 121 e emit blue light 162 in response to being activated by output signal S Output2 .
- LEDs 121 a - 121 e do not emit blue light 162 in response to being deactivated by output signal S Output2 .
- FIG. 7 c is a schematic diagram of input 112 operatively coupled to LED sub-array 122 through LED driver circuit 142 , wherein input 112 operates as a potentiometer.
- input 112 includes a potentiometer 137 c , which is connected between power terminal 108 a and current return 136 .
- the output of potentiometer 137 c is connected to LED driver circuit 142 , which includes an LED driver circuit chip 152 , so that LED driver circuit 142 receives input signal S Input3 .
- LED driver circuit chip 152 provides output signal S Output3 to LED sub-array 122 ( FIG. 6 a ) in response to receiving input signal S Input3 from input 112 .
- LED driver circuit chip 152 provides output signal S Output3 to LEDs 122 a - 122 e .
- LEDs 122 a - 122 e emit green light 163 in response to being activated by output signal S Output3 .
- LEDs 122 a - 122 e do not emit green light 163 in response to being deactivated by output signal S Output3 .
- FIG. 7 d is a schematic diagram of input 113 operatively coupled to LED sub-array 123 through LED driver circuit 143 , wherein input 113 operates as a potentiometer.
- input 113 includes a potentiometer 137 d , which is connected between power terminal 108 a and current return 136 .
- the output of potentiometer 137 d is connected to LED driver circuit 143 , which includes an LED driver circuit chip 153 , so that LED driver circuit 143 receives input signal S Input4 .
- LED driver circuit chip 153 provides output signal S Output4 to LED sub-array 123 ( FIG. 6 a ) in response to receiving input signal S Input4 from input 113 .
- LED driver circuit chip 153 provides output signal S Output4 to LEDs 123 a - 123 e .
- LEDs 123 a - 123 e emit red light 166 in response to being activated by output signal S Output4 .
- LEDs 123 a - 123 e do not emit red light 166 in response to being deactivated by output signal S Output4 .
- FIG. 7 e is a schematic diagram of input 114 operatively coupled to LED sub-array 124 through LED driver circuit 144 , wherein input 114 operates as a potentiometer.
- input 114 includes a potentiometer 137 e , which is connected between power terminal 108 a and current return 136 .
- the output of potentiometer 137 e is connected to LED driver circuit 144 , which includes an LED driver circuit chip 154 , so that LED driver circuit 144 receives input signal S Input5 .
- LED driver circuit chip 154 provides output signal S Output5 to LED sub-array 124 ( FIG. 6 a ) in response to receiving input signal S Input5 from input 114 .
- LED driver circuit chip 154 provides output signal S Output5 to LEDs 124 a - 124 e .
- LEDs 124 a - 124 e emit IR light 167 in response to being activated by output signal S Output5 .
- LEDs 124 a - 124 e do not emit IR light 167 in response to being deactivated by output signal S Output5 .
- FIG. 8 a is a schematic diagram of input 110 operatively coupled to LED sub-array 125 through LED driver circuit 145 .
- input 110 includes potentiometer 137 a , which is connected between power terminal 108 a and current return 136 .
- the output of potentiometer 137 a is connected to LED driver circuit 145 , which includes an LED driver circuit chip 155 , so that LED driver circuit 145 receives input signal S Input1 .
- LED driver circuit chip 155 provides output signal S Output1 to LED sub-array 125 ( FIG. 6 b ) in response to receiving input signal S Input1 from input 110 .
- LED driver circuit chip 155 provides output signal S Output1 to LEDs 125 a - 125 e .
- LEDs 125 a - 125 e emit UV light 160 in response to being activated by output signal S Output1 .
- LEDs 125 a - 125 e do not emit UV light 160 in response to being deactivated by output signal S Output1 .
- FIG. 8 b is a schematic diagram of input 111 operatively coupled to LED sub-array 126 through LED driver circuit 146 .
- input 111 includes potentiometer 137 b , which is connected between power terminal 108 a and current return 136 .
- the output of potentiometer 137 b is connected to LED driver circuit 146 , which includes an LED driver circuit chip 156 , so that LED driver circuit 146 receives input signal S Input2 .
- LED driver circuit chip 156 provides output signal S Output2 to LED sub-array 126 ( FIG. 6 b ) in response to receiving input signal S Input2 from input 111 .
- LED driver circuit chip 156 provides output signal S Output2 to LEDs 126 a - 126 e .
- LEDs 126 a - 126 e emit blue light 162 in response to being activated by output signal S Output2 .
- LEDs 126 a - 126 e do not emit blue light 162 in response to being deactivated by output signal S Output2 .
- FIG. 8 c is a schematic diagram of input 112 operatively coupled to LED sub-array 127 through LED driver circuit 147 .
- input 112 includes potentiometer 137 c , which is connected between power terminal 108 a and current return 136 .
- the output of potentiometer 137 c is connected to LED driver circuit 147 , which includes an LED driver circuit chip 157 , so that LED driver circuit 147 receives input signal S Input3 .
- LED driver circuit chip 157 provides output signal S Output3 to LED sub-array 127 ( FIG. 6 b ) in response to receiving input signal S Input3 from input 112 .
- LED driver circuit chip 157 provides output signal S Output3 to LEDs 127 a - 127 e .
- LEDs 127 a - 1272 e emit green light 163 in response to being activated by output signal S Output3 .
- LEDs 127 a - 127 e do not emit green light 163 in response to being deactivated by output signal S Output3 .
- FIG. 8 d is a schematic diagram of input 113 operatively coupled to LED sub-array 128 through LED driver circuit 148 .
- input 113 includes potentiometer 137 d , which is connected between power terminal 108 a and current return 136 .
- the output of potentiometer 137 d is connected to LED driver circuit 148 , which includes an LED driver circuit chip 158 , so that LED driver circuit 148 receives input signal S Input4 .
- LED driver circuit chip 158 provides output signal S Output4 to LED sub-array 128 ( FIG. 6 b ) in response to receiving input signal S Input4 from input 113 .
- LED driver circuit chip 158 provides output signal S Output4 to LEDs 127 a - 127 e .
- LEDs 127 a - 127 e emit red light 166 in response to being activated by output signal S Output4 .
- LEDs 127 a - 127 e do not emit red light 166 in response to being deactivated by output signal S Output4 .
- FIG. 8 e is a schematic diagram of input 114 operatively coupled to LED sub-array 129 through LED driver circuit 149 .
- input 114 includes potentiometer 137 e , which is connected between power terminal 108 a and current return 136 .
- the output of potentiometer 137 e is connected to LED driver circuit 149 , which includes an LED driver circuit chip 159 , so that LED driver circuit 149 receives input signal S Input5 .
- LED driver circuit chip 159 provides output signal S Output5 to LED sub-array 129 ( FIG. 6 b ) in response to receiving input signal S Input5 from input 114 .
- LED driver circuit chip 159 provides output signal S Output5 to LEDs 129 a - 129 e .
- LEDs 129 a - 129 e emit IR light 167 in response to being activated by output signal S Output5 .
- LEDs 129 a - 129 e do not emit IR light 167 in response to being deactivated by output signal S Output5 .
- the light emitting diodes included with LED arrays 102 and 103 can emit many different colors of light in response to output signals received from LED controller 130 , as will be discussed in more detail presently.
- FIG. 9 a is a graph of a wavelength spectrum 192 of light provided by lighting system 100 b , wherein wavelength spectrum 192 includes color mixing.
- wavelength spectrum 192 corresponds to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above with wavelength spectrum 180 .
- input 110 includes potentiometer 137 a .
- potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 are decreased.
- the intensity of UV light 160 decreases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 192 b , in response to decreasing the power of input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 with potentiometer 137 a.
- potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 are increased.
- the intensity of UV light 160 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 192 c , in response to increasing the power of input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 with potentiometer 137 a.
- input 111 includes potentiometer 137 b .
- potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 are decreased.
- the intensity of blue light 162 decreases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 193 b , in response to decreasing the power of input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 with potentiometer 137 b.
- potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 are increased.
- the intensity of blue light 162 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 193 c , in response to increasing the power of input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 with potentiometer 137 b.
- input 112 includes potentiometer 137 c .
- potentiometer 137 c is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input3 and output signal S Output3 are decreased.
- the intensity of green light 163 decreases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 194 b , in response to decreasing the power of input signal S Input3 and output signal S Output3 with potentiometer 137 c.
- potentiometer 137 c is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input3 and output signal S Output3 are increased.
- the intensity of green light 163 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 194 c , in response to increasing the power of input signal S Input3 and output signal S Output3 with potentiometer 137 c.
- input 113 includes potentiometer 137 d .
- potentiometer 137 d is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input4 and output signal S Output4 are decreased.
- the intensity of red light 166 decreases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 195 b , in response to decreasing the power of input signal S Input4 and output signal S Output4 with potentiometer 137 d.
- potentiometer 137 d is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input4 and output signal S Output4 are increased.
- the intensity of red light 166 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 195 d , in response to increasing the power of input signal S Input4 and output signal S Output4 with potentiometer 137 d.
- input 114 includes potentiometer 137 e .
- potentiometer 137 e is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input5 and output signal S Output5 are decreased.
- the intensity of IR light 167 decreases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 196 b , in response to decreasing the power of input signal S Input5 and output signal S Output5 with potentiometer 137 e.
- potentiometer 137 e is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input5 and output signal S Output5 are increased.
- the intensity of IR light 167 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 195 e , in response to increasing the power of input signal S Input5 and output signal S Output5 with potentiometer 137 e .
- the light emitting diodes included with LED arrays 102 and 103 emit different colors of light in response to output signals received from LED controller 130 .
- FIG. 9 b is a graph of a wavelength spectrum 200 of light provided by lighting system 100 b , wherein wavelength spectrum 200 includes color mixing.
- wavelength spectrum 200 corresponds to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above with wavelength spectrum 180 .
- potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 are adjusted, and the intensity of UV light 160 is driven to zero.
- potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 are adjusted, and the intensity of blue light 162 is driven to that indicated by wavelength spectrum 193 a .
- potentiometer 137 c is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input3 and output signal S Output3 are adjusted, and the intensity of green light 163 is driven to that indicated by wavelength spectrum 194 b.
- potentiometer 137 d is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input4 and output signal S Output4 are adjusted, and the intensity of red light 166 is driven to that indicated by wavelength spectrum 195 a .
- potentiometer 137 e is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input5 and output signal S Output5 are adjusted, and the intensity of IR light 167 is driven to that indicated by wavelength spectrum 196 c.
- FIG. 9 c is a graph of a wavelength spectrum 201 of light provided by lighting system 100 b , wherein wavelength spectrum 201 includes color mixing.
- wavelength spectrum 201 corresponds to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above with wavelength spectrum 180 .
- potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 are adjusted, and the intensity of UV light 160 is driven to zero.
- potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 are adjusted, and the intensity of blue light 162 is driven to that indicated by wavelength spectrum 193 a .
- potentiometer 137 c is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input3 and output signal S Output3 are adjusted, and the intensity of green light 163 is driven to that indicated by wavelength spectrum 194 c.
- potentiometer 137 d is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input4 and output signal S Output4 are adjusted, and the intensity of red light 166 is driven to that indicated by wavelength spectrum 195 b .
- potentiometer 137 e is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input5 and output signal S Output5 are adjusted, and the intensity of IR light 167 is driven to that indicated by wavelength spectrum 196 b.
- the desired mixture of light provided by lighting system 100 b can be chosen to correspond to an action spectrum of a physiological activity of a plant, as will be discussed in more detail presently.
- FIG. 9 d is a graph of a wavelength spectrum 202 of light provided by lighting system 100 b , wherein wavelength spectrum 202 includes color mixing. Action spectrum corresponding to chlorophyll a is also shown in FIG. 9 d .
- wavelength spectrum 202 and the action spectrum corresponding to chlorophyll a correspond to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm).
- potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 are adjusted, and the intensity of UV light 160 is driven to zero.
- potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 are adjusted, and the intensity of blue light 162 is driven to that indicated by wavelength spectrum 193 a .
- potentiometer 137 c is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input3 and output signal S Output3 are adjusted, and the intensity of green light 163 is driven to zero.
- potentiometer 137 d is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input4 and output signal S Output4 are adjusted, and the intensity of red light 166 is driven to that indicated by wavelength spectrum 195 a .
- potentiometer 137 e is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input5 and output signal S Output5 are adjusted, and the intensity of IR light 167 is driven to zero. In this way, the desired mixture of light provided by lighting system 100 b is chosen to correspond to the action spectrum corresponding to chlorophyll a.
- FIG. 9 e is a graph of a wavelength spectrum 203 of light provided by lighting system 100 b , wherein wavelength spectrum 203 includes color mixing. Action spectrum corresponding to ⁇ -carotene is also shown in FIG. 9 e .
- wavelength spectrum 203 and the action spectrum corresponding to ⁇ -carotene correspond to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm).
- LED sub-arrays 120 and 125 include LEDs which emit violet light 161 when activated, and do not emit violet light 161 when deactivated.
- LEDs 120 a , 120 b , 120 c , 120 d and 120 e in FIG. 7 a emit violet light 161 instead of UV light 160 .
- LEDs 125 a , 125 b , 125 c , 125 d and 125 e in FIG. 8 a emit blue light 162 instead of UV light 160 .
- potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 are adjusted, and the intensity of violet light 161 is driven to that indicated by wavelength spectrum 196 a .
- potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 are adjusted, and the intensity of blue light 162 is driven to that indicated by wavelength spectrum 193 a .
- potentiometer 137 c is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input3 and output signal S Output3 are adjusted, and the intensity of green light 163 is driven to zero.
- potentiometer 137 d is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input4 and output signal S Output4 are adjusted, and the intensity of red light 166 is driven to zero.
- potentiometer 137 e is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input5 and output signal S Output5 are adjusted, and the intensity of IR light 167 is driven to zero.
- the desired mixture of light provided by lighting system 100 b is chosen to correspond to the action spectrum corresponding to ⁇ -carotene.
- FIG. 9 f is a graph of a wavelength spectrum 204 of light provided by lighting system 100 b , wherein wavelength spectrum 204 includes color mixing. Action spectrum corresponding to pelargonin is also shown in FIG. 9 f .
- wavelength spectrum 204 and the action spectrum corresponding to pelargonin correspond to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm).
- LED sub-arrays 120 and 125 include LEDs which emit green light 163 when activated, and do not emit green light 163 when deactivated.
- LEDs 120 a , 120 b , 120 c , 120 d and 120 e in FIG. 7 a emit violet light 161 instead of UV light 160 .
- LEDs 125 a , 125 b , 125 c , 125 d and 125 e in FIG. 8 a emit green light 163 instead of UV light 160 .
- LED sub-arrays 121 and 126 include LEDs which emit blue-green light 171 when activated, and do not emit blue-green light 171 when deactivated.
- LEDs 121 a , 121 b , 121 c , 121 d and 121 e in FIG. 7 b emit blue-green light 171 instead of blue light 162 .
- LEDs 126 a , 126 b , 126 c , 126 d and 126 e in FIG. 8 b emit blue-green light 171 instead of blue light 162 .
- potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 are adjusted, and the intensity of violet light 161 is driven to zero.
- potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 are adjusted, and the intensity of blue-green light 171 is driven to that indicated by wavelength spectrum 197 a .
- potentiometer 137 c is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input3 and output signal S Output3 are adjusted, and the intensity of green light 163 is driven to that indicated by wavelength spectrum 194 c.
- potentiometer 137 d is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input4 and output signal S Output4 are adjusted, and the intensity of red light 166 is driven to zero.
- potentiometer 137 e is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input5 and output signal S Output5 are adjusted, and the intensity of IR light 167 is driven to zero. In this way, the desired mixture of light provided by lighting system 100 b is chosen to correspond to the action spectrum corresponding to pelargonin.
- the desired mixture of light provided by lighting system 100 b can be chosen to correspond to a wavelength spectrum of sunlight, as will be discussed in more detail presently.
- FIG. 9 g is a graph of a wavelength spectrum 205 of light provided by lighting system 100 b , wherein wavelength spectrum 205 includes color mixing.
- a wavelength spectrum 197 corresponding to sunlight is also shown in FIG. 9 g .
- wavelength spectra 197 and 205 correspond to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm).
- LED sub-arrays 120 and 125 include LEDs which emit UV light 160 when activated, and do not emit UV light 160 when deactivated.
- LEDs 120 a , 120 b , 120 c , 120 d and 120 e in FIG. 7 a emit UV light 160 .
- LEDs 125 a , 125 b , 125 c , 125 d and 125 e in FIG. 8 a emit violet light 161 .
- LED sub-arrays 121 and 126 include LEDs which emit white light 168 when activated, and do not emit white light 168 when deactivated.
- LEDs 121 a , 121 b , 121 c , 121 d and 121 e in FIG. 7 b emit white light 168 .
- LEDs 125 a , 125 b , 125 c , 125 d and 125 e in FIG. 8 b emit white light 168 .
- a wavelength spectrum 197 corresponding to white light 168 is also shown in FIG. 9 d .
- the LEDs of LED sub-arrays 121 and 126 can emit white light 168 in many different ways.
- the LEDs of LED sub-arrays 121 and 126 emit white light 168 because they include phosphor coated LEDs, which emit blue light. In another example, the LEDs of LED sub-arrays 121 and 126 emit white light 168 because they include phosphor coated LEDs, which emit UV light.
- potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input1 and output signal S Output1 are adjusted, and the intensity of UV light 160 is driven to zero.
- potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input2 and output signal S Output2 are adjusted, and the intensity of white light 168 is driven to that indicated by wavelength spectrum 197 .
- potentiometer 137 c is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input3 and output signal S Output3 are adjusted, and the intensity of green light 163 is driven to that indicated by wavelength spectrum 194 b.
- potentiometer 137 d is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input4 and output signal S Output4 are adjusted, and the intensity of red light 166 is driven to that indicated by wavelength spectrum 195 b .
- potentiometer 137 e is adjusted so the power of input signal S Input5 and output signal S Output5 are adjusted, and the intensity of IR light 167 is driven to that indicated by wavelength spectrum 196 b .
- the desired mixture of light provided by lighting system 100 b is chosen to correspond to a wavelength spectrum of sunlight.
- FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a lighting system 100 c , which includes a programmable logic controller 133 operatively coupled to LED array 102 through LED controller 130 .
- Lighting system 100 c includes a timer circuit 134 operatively coupled to programmable logic circuit 133 .
- Timer circuit 134 can be of many different types, such as a 555 timer. 555 timers are made by many different manufacturers. For example, ECG Philips makes the ECG955M chip, Maxim makes the ICM7555 chip and Motorola makes the MC1455/MC1555 chip.
- Timer circuit 134 provides a timing signal S Timer to programmable logic circuit 133 and, in response, programmable logic circuit 133 provides input signals S Input1 , S Input2 , S Input3 , S Input4 and S Input5 to LED controller 130 .
- LED controller 130 provides input signals S Output1 , S Output2 , S Output3 , S Output4 and S Output5 to LED array 102 in response to receiving input signals S Input1 , S Input2 , S Input3 , S Input4 and S Input5 .
- programmable logic controller 133 is programmed to adjust input signals S Input1 , S Input2 , S Input3 , S Input4 and S Input5 in response to receiving timing signal S Timer .
- Programmable logic controller 133 can adjust input signals S Input1 , S Input2 , S Input3 , S Input4 and S Input5 in response to receiving timing signal S Timer in many different ways.
- programmable logic controller 133 adjusts input signals S Input1 , S Input2 , S Input3 , S Input4 and S Input5 in response to receiving timing signal S Timer so that the relative intensities of light 160 , 162 , 163 , 166 and 167 of FIG. 9 a are adjusted relative to each other, as described in more detail with FIGS. 9 a -9 g .
- lighting system 100 c includes a programmable logic circuit which adjusts input signals in response to receiving a timing signal from a timer.
- lighting system 100 c allows the intensities of light 160 , 162 , 163 , 166 and 167 to be adjusted relative to each other as a period of time.
- the period of time can have many different values.
- the period of time is in a range from about half an hour to more than one hour.
- the period of time is in a range from about a day to several days.
- the period of time can also be in a range from a day to a week or more, or from a day to a month or more.
- the period of time corresponds with the yearly cycle of the sun so that lighting system 100 c mimics the sun.
- FIGS. 11 a and 11 b are bottom and top perspective views, respectively, of a lighting system 100 d .
- lighting system 100 d is similar to lighting system 100 b of FIGS. 5 a -5 e .
- lighting system 100 d includes inputs 110 , 111 , 112 , 113 and 114 ( FIG. 11 b ) operatively coupled to LED arrays 102 and 103 through LED controller 130 (not shown).
- LED arrays 102 and 103 each include LED sub-arrays connected to inputs 110 - 114 .
- the LED sub-arrays of LED arrays 102 and 103 each include a plurality of LEDs.
- the LEDs of arrays 102 and 103 can be of many different types, such as those mentioned above.
- LED arrays 102 and 103 are spaced apart from each other by distance L ( FIG. 11 b ) so that lighting system 100 d provides a desired intensity of light away from LED arrays 102 and 103 .
- LED arrays 102 and 103 are spaced apart from each other by distance L so that lighting system 100 d can be more effectively cooled, as will be discussed in more detail below.
- LED arrays 102 and 103 include the same number of LEDs.
- LED arrays 102 and 103 can include different numbers of LEDs.
- LED array 102 includes twenty five LEDs and LED array 103 includes twenty six LEDs.
- lighting system 100 d includes lighting system housing 101 which houses LED arrays 102 and 103 , and extends between housing sides 116 a and 116 b .
- FIGS. 11 c and 11 d are top and back perspective views of lighting system 100 d with and without lighting system housing 101 , respectively.
- FIG. 11 e is a front perspective view of lighting system 100 d without lighting system housing 101 .
- lighting system housing 101 includes opposed walls 101 a and 101 b .
- Lighting system housing 101 includes angled wall 101 g , which extends from the edge of wall 101 a .
- Lighting system 101 includes angled wall 101 b which extends from the edge of angled wall 101 g .
- Lighting system 101 includes angled wall 101 e which extends from the edge of wall 101 f .
- Lighting system 101 includes angled wall 101 d which extends from the edge of angled wall 101 e .
- Lighting system 101 includes back wall 101 c which extends from edges of angled walls 101 b and 101 d.
- lighting system 100 b includes on/off switch 109 operatively coupled with LED controller 130 .
- On/off switch 109 is for turning LED controller 130 on and off.
- on/off switch 109 extends through angled wall 101 e , as shown in FIG. 11 b.
- lighting system 100 d includes an antenna, which allows the flow of a wireless signal, wherein the wireless signal can flow to and from lighting system 100 d .
- the wireless signal can flow in many different ways, such as through a Wi-Fi network.
- the wireless signal can include many different types of information, as will be discussed in more detail below.
- the wireless signal includes maintenance information regarding the operation of lighting system 100 d .
- lighting system 100 d includes at least one antenna.
- lighting system 100 d includes antennas 210 a , 210 b and 210 c . The antennas can be positioned at many different locations.
- Antenna 210 a extends through wall 101 a and antenna 210 b extends through angled wall 101 b for illustrative purposes. It should be noted that antennas 210 a and 210 b can extend through other walls of lighting system housing 101 , if desired.
- antenna 210 c extends through a housing side 116 a for illustrative purposes. It should be noted that antenna 210 c can extend through housing side 116 b , if desired. In this way, the antennas of lighting system 100 d can be positioned to allow communication in a desired direction. As will be discussed in more detail below, the antennas of lighting system 100 d allow the communication to a remote device, such as a sensor, computer and the LED controller another lighting system. It should be noted that the antennas of lighting system 100 d are in communication with a communication module, such as a transceiver and modem, as will be discussed in more detail below.
- a communication module such as a transceiver and modem
- lighting system 100 d includes a sensor, which senses a condition.
- the condition can be of many different types, such as a light condition.
- the sensor operates as a light sensor when the sensor senses a light condition.
- the sensor can operate as a photosynthesis meter, moisture meter, and gas analyzers to detect conditions proximate to lighting system 100 d , and apply feedback to adjust plant growth conditions.
- the sensor is responsive to the physiological activity of the plant.
- the sensor is carried by a housing of the lighting system, as shown in FIGS. 11 a -11 e .
- the sensor is positioned remotely from lighting system 100 d .
- the sensor can be in communication with the other components of lighting system 100 d in many different ways, such as through wired and wireless communication.
- the moisture meter can be a wireless moisture meter, such as the one disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,975,236.
- the gas analyzer can be of many different types, such as an infrared gas analyzer.
- One type of infrared gas analyzers is referred to as the Anarad AR-500-R, which is responsive to carbon dioxide gas. More information regarding gas analyzers can be found in U.S. Pat. No. 6,624,887.
- the sensors of lighting system 100 d can all be the same type of sensor, or different types of sensors.
- lighting system 100 d includes sensors 211 a , 211 b , 211 c , 211 d , 211 e and 211 f . It should be noted that, in general, lighting system 100 d includes one or more sensors. In this embodiment, lighting system 100 d includes six sensors for illustrative purposes. It should also be noted that sensors 211 a , 211 b , 211 c , 211 d , 211 e and 211 f can all be the same type of sensors, or different types of sensors.
- the sensors can be positioned at many different locations.
- Sensor 211 a is coupled to wall 101 a and sensor 211 b is coupled to angled wall 101 b for illustrative purposes.
- sensor 211 e is coupled to wall 101 f and sensor 211 f is coupled to angled wall 101 d for illustrative purposes. It should be noted that sensors 211 a , 211 b , 211 c and 211 d can be coupled to other walls of lighting system housing 101 , if desired.
- sensor 211 c is coupled to front panel 115 and sensor 211 d is coupled to housing side 116 b for illustrative purposes. It should be noted that sensor 211 d can be coupled to housing side 116 a , if desired. In this way, the sensors of lighting system 100 d can be positioned to sense the condition from a desired direction. As will be discussed in more detail below, the sensors of lighting system 100 d are in communication with an LED controller of lighting system 100 d , such as LED controller 130 .
- lighting system 100 d includes fans 104 a and 104 b which provide cooling.
- fans 104 a and 104 b can cool LED controller 130 (not shown) and LED arrays 102 and 103 .
- Fans 104 a and 104 b can be positioned at many different locations of lighting system 100 d . In this embodiment, fans 104 a and 104 b are positioned between LED arrays 102 and 103 .
- lighting system 100 includes heatsinks 105 a and 105 b which provide cooling for LED arrays 102 and 103 , respectively.
- Heatsinks 105 a and 105 b also provide cooling for LED controller 130 .
- LED arrays 102 and 103 are spaced apart from each other by distance L, which allows LED arrays 102 and 103 to be more effectively cooled by fans 104 a and 104 b , and corresponding heatsinks 105 a and 105 b.
- LED sub-arrays 120 , 121 , 122 , 123 and 124 each include five LEDs for illustrative purposes so that LED array 102 includes twenty five LEDs.
- LED array 102 includes two or more sub-arrays LEDs, and the LED sub-arrays generally include one or more LEDs.
- LED sub-array 120 includes LEDs 120 a , 120 b , 120 c , 120 d and 120 e
- LED sub-array 121 includes LEDs 121 a , 121 b , 121 c , 121 d and 121 e
- LED sub-array 122 includes LEDs 122 a , 122 b , 122 c , 122 d and 122 e
- LED sub-array 123 includes LEDs 123 a , 123 b , 123 c , 123 d and 123 e .
- LED sub-array 124 includes LEDs 124 a , 124 b , 124 c , 124 d and 124 e .
- the light emitting diodes included with LED array 102 can emit many different colors of light in response to output signals received from LED controller 130 , as will be discussed in more detail below with FIGS. 9 a - 9 f.
- LED array 103 includes LED sub-arrays 125 , 126 , 127 , 128 and 129 carried by LED array support structure 106 b .
- LED array 103 generally includes one or more LED sub-arrays, but it includes five LED sub-arrays in this embodiment for illustrative purposes. An embodiment in which LED array 103 includes two LED sub-arrays is discussed in more detail above.
- LED sub-arrays 125 , 126 , 127 , 128 and 129 each include five LEDs for illustrative purposes so that LED array 103 includes twenty five LEDs.
- LED array 103 includes two or more LEDs, and LED sub-arrays generally include one or more LEDs.
- LED sub-array 125 includes LEDs 125 a , 125 b , 125 c , 125 d and 125 e
- LED sub-array 126 includes LEDs 126 a , 126 b , 126 c , 126 d and 126 e
- LED sub-array 127 includes LEDs 127 a , 127 b , 127 c , 127 d and 127 e
- LED sub-array 128 includes LEDs 128 a , 128 b , 128 c , 128 d and 128 e .
- LED sub-array 129 includes LEDs 129 a , 129 b , 129 c , 129 d and 129 e .
- the light emitting diodes included with LED array 103 can emit many different colors of light in response to output signals received from LED controller 130 , as discussed in more detail above.
- LED sub-arrays 120 and 125 include LEDs which are capable of emitting UV light 160 .
- LEDs 120 a - 120 e and LEDs 125 a - 125 e are capable of emitting UV light 160 .
- UV light 160 has a wavelength between about 300 and 380 nm.
- IR light 167 has a wavelength between about 350 and 380 nm.
- LED sub-arrays 121 and 126 include LEDs which are capable of emitting blue light 162 . Hence, LEDs 121 a - 121 e and LEDs 126 a - 126 e are capable of emitting blue light 162 .
- LED sub-arrays 122 and 127 include LEDs which are capable of emitting green light 163 . Hence, LEDs 122 a - 122 e and LEDs 127 a - 127 e are capable of emitting green light 163 .
- LED sub-arrays 123 and 128 include LEDs which are capable of emitting red light 166 .
- LEDs 123 a - 123 e and LEDs 128 a - 128 e are capable of emitting red light 166 .
- LED sub-arrays 124 and 129 include LEDs which are capable of emitting IR light 167 .
- LEDs 124 a - 124 e and LEDs 129 a - 129 e are capable of emitting IR light 167 .
- IR light 167 has a wavelength between about 750 and 825 nm. In other embodiments, IR light 167 has a wavelength between about 750 and 900 nm.
- FIG. 12 a is a block diagram of one embodiment of a lighting system 100 e .
- lighting system 100 e can be included with lighting system 100 d of FIGS. 11 a -11 e .
- lighting system 100 e includes LED controller 130 , which includes LED sub-controller 131 .
- LED sub-controller 131 is in communication with LED array 102 , as discussed in more detail above.
- the operation of LED array 102 is adjustable in response to adjusting output signal S Output .
- LED controller 130 and LED sub-controller 131 are powered by power supply 108 , as discussed in more detail above.
- the embodiments discussed below refer to LED array 102 and LED sub-controller 131 of LED controller 130 .
- the discussion also applies to LED array 103 and LED sub-controller 132 , which are discussed in more detail above.
- lighting system 100 e includes sensors 211 a and 211 b , which are in communication with LED controller 130 .
- sensors 211 a and 211 b are in communication with LED sub-controller 131 .
- Sensors 211 a and 211 b can be of many different types, such as the types mentioned above.
- lighting system 100 e includes antenna 210 c in communication with LED controller 130 through a communication module 212 c .
- antenna 210 c is in communication with LED sub-controller 131 through communication module 212 c .
- Communication module 212 c can be of many different types, such as a wireless transceiver and wireless modem.
- a modem and transceiver send and receive signals, but a modem modulates and demodulates the signal.
- Wireless signal S Wireless1 can be provided in many different ways, such as by a remote device.
- the remote device can be of many different types, such as a computer and another lighting system.
- antenna 210 c receives wireless signal S Wireless1 and, in response, communication module 212 c provides a control signal S Control to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED controller 130 is adjusted in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control .
- the operation of LED controller 130 can be adjusted in many different ways. For example, in some situations, LED sub-controller 131 is turned on and off, such as by turning on and off power supply 108 , in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control . In another embodiment, LED sub-controller 131 adjusts the wavelength of light provided by LED array 102 in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control .
- the operation of LED controller 130 is adjusted, in response to receiving control signal S Control , to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED array 102 . It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED array 102 to adjust the amount of power used by lighting system 100 e .
- the operation of a sensor such as sensors 211 a and/or 211 b is adjusted in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control . The operation of the sensor can be adjusted in many different ways, such as by turning the sensor on and off.
- the sensor of lighting system 100 e senses a condition, such as a light condition or the physiological activity of the plant, and, in response, provides a sense signal to LED controller 130 .
- a condition such as a light condition or the physiological activity of the plant
- sensor 211 a is a light sensor which senses a wavelength of light and, in response, provides a sense signal S Sense1 to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED controller 130 is adjusted in response to receiving sense signal S Sense1 .
- the operation of LED controller 130 is adjusted to adjust the wavelength of light provided by LED array 102 .
- the operation of LED controller 130 is adjusted to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED array 102 .
- sense signal S Sense1 is flowed through communication module 212 c and antenna 210 c as wireless signal S Wireless1 , wherein wireless signal S Wireless1 includes information corresponding to the wavelength of light sensed by sensor 211 a.
- sensor 211 b is a gas sensor which senses a type of gas proximate to lighting system 100 e and, in response, provides a sense signal S Sense2 to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED controller 130 is adjusted in response to receiving sense signal S Sense2
- the operation of LED controller 130 is adjusted to adjust the wavelength of light provided by LED array 102 .
- the operation of LED controller 130 is adjusted to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED array 102 . It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED array 102 to adjust the amount of power used by lighting system 100 e .
- sense signal S Sense2 is flowed through communication module 212 c and antenna 210 c as wireless signal S Wireless1 , wherein wireless signal S Wireless1 includes information corresponding to the type of gas sensed by sensor 211 b.
- sensor 211 b is a photosynthesis meter which senses the plant stress level of a plant proximate to lighting system 100 e and, in response, provides sense signal S Sense2 to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED controller 130 is adjusted in response to receiving sense signal S Sense2
- the operation of LED controller 130 is adjusted to adjust the wavelength of light provided by LED array 102 .
- the operation of LED controller 130 is adjusted to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED array 102 . It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED array 102 to adjust the amount of power used by lighting system 100 e .
- sense signal S Sense2 is flowed through communication module 212 c and antenna 210 c as wireless signal S Wireless1 , wherein wireless signal S Wireless1 includes information corresponding to the plant stress level sensed by sensor 211 b.
- sensor 211 a is a gas analyzer which senses the type and/or amount of gas proximate to lighting system 100 e and, in response, provides sense signal S Sense1 to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED controller 130 is adjusted in response to receiving sense signal S Sense1 .
- the operation of LED controller 130 is adjusted to adjust the wavelength of light provided by LED array 102 .
- the operation of LED controller 130 is adjusted to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED array 102 . It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED array 102 to adjust the amount of power used by lighting system 100 e .
- sense signal S Sense1 is flowed through communication module 212 c and antenna 210 c as wireless signal S Wireless1 , wherein wireless signal S Wireless1 includes information corresponding to the type and/or amount of gas sensed by sensor 211 a.
- wireless signal S Wireless1 includes information corresponding to a growth season.
- Antenna 210 c receives wireless signal S Wireless1 and, in response, communication module 212 c provides control signal S Control to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED controller 130 is adjusted in response to receiving control signal S Control .
- the operation of LED controller 130 can be adjusted in many different ways. For example, in some situations, LED sub-controller 131 adjusts the wavelength of light provided by LED array 102 in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control . In this way, the wavelength of light provided by LED array 102 is adjusted in response to an indication of the growth season.
- LED sub-controller 131 adjusts the intensity of light provide by LED array 102 in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control . It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED array 102 to adjust the amount of power used by lighting system 100 e . In this way, the amount of power used by lighting system 100 e is adjustable in response to the indication of the growth season.
- the operation of the sensor such as sensors 211 a and/or 211 b , is adjusted in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control . In this way, the operation of sensors 211 a and/or 211 b is adjusted in response to the indication of the growth season.
- wireless signal S Wireless1 includes information corresponding to a type of plant positioned proximate to lighting system 100 e .
- Antenna 210 c receives wireless signal S Wireless1 and, in response, communication module 212 c provides control signal S Control to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED controller 130 is adjusted in response to receiving control signal S Control .
- the operation of LED controller 130 can be adjusted in many different ways. For example, in some situations, LED sub-controller 131 adjusts the wavelength of light provided by LED array 102 in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control . In this way, the wavelength of light provided by LED array 102 is adjusted in response to an indication of the type of plant positioned proximate to lighting system 100 e .
- the operation of the sensor is adjusted in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control .
- the operation of sensors 211 a and/or 211 b is adjusted in response to the indication of the type of plant positioned proximate to lighting system 100 e.
- FIG. 12 b is a block diagram of one embodiment of a lighting system 100 f .
- lighting system 100 f can be included with lighting system 100 d of FIGS. 11 a -11 e .
- lighting system 100 f includes a portion of the embodiment of lighting system 100 a of FIG. 1 b .
- lighting system 100 f includes LED controller 130 , which includes LED sub-controller 131 .
- LED sub-controller 131 includes LED driver circuits 140 and 141 , wherein LED driver circuits 140 and 141 are driven by power signal S Power .
- LED controller 130 and LED sub-controller 131 are powered by power supply 108 , as discussed in more detail above.
- lighting system 100 f includes LED array 102 , wherein LED sub-controller 131 is in communication with LED array 102 , as discussed in more detail above.
- LED driver circuit 140 is in communication with LED sub-array 120 and LED driver circuit 141 is in communication with LED sub-array 121 .
- the operation of LED sub-arrays 120 and 121 are adjustable in response to adjusting output signals S Output1 and S Output2 , respectively.
- LED sub-arrays 120 and 121 are capable of providing a desire wavelength spectrum, such as those shown in FIGS. 3 a , 3 b , 3 c , 4 a , 4 b , 4 c , 4 d , 4 e , 4 f , 4 g , 4 h and 4 i .
- LED sub-array 120 provides the wavelength spectrum of FIG. 3 a and LED sub-array 121 provides the wavelength spectrum of FIG. 3 b .
- LED sub-array 120 provides the wavelength spectrum of FIG. 3 c and LED sub-array 121 provides the wavelength spectrum of FIG. 4 a.
- LED sub-arrays 120 and 121 are adjustable with time. For example, during a first time period, LED sub-array 120 provides the wavelength spectrum of FIG. 3 a and, during a second time period, LED sub-array 120 provides the wavelength spectrum of FIG. 4 a . Further, during the first time period, LED sub-array 121 provides the wavelength spectrum of FIG. 3 b and, during the second time period, LED sub-array 121 provides the wavelength spectrum of FIG. 4 g.
- lighting system 100 f includes sensors 211 a and 211 b , which are in communication with LED sub-controller 131 .
- sensors 211 a and 211 b are in communication with LED driver circuits 140 and 141 , respectively.
- Sensors 211 a and 211 b can be of many different types, such as the types mentioned above.
- lighting system 100 f includes antenna 210 a in communication with LED sub-controller 131 through a communication module 212 a .
- antenna 210 a is in communication with LED driver circuit 140 through communication module 212 a .
- Communication module 212 a can be of many different types, such as a wireless transceiver.
- lighting system 100 f includes antenna 210 b in communication with LED sub-controller 131 through a communication module 212 b .
- antenna 210 b is in communication with LED driver circuit 141 through communication module 212 b .
- Communication modules 212 a and 212 b can be of many different types, such as a wireless transceiver.
- Wireless signal S Wireless1 can be provided in many different ways, such as by a remote device.
- the remote device can be of many different types, such as a computer and another lighting system.
- the operation of lighting system 100 f is similar to the operation of lighting system 100 e of FIG. 12 a .
- antenna 210 a receives wireless signal S Wireless1 and, in response, communication module 212 a provides control signal S Control1 to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 140 is adjusted in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control1 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 140 can be adjusted in many different ways. For example, in some situations, LED driver circuit 140 is turned on and off, such as by turning on and off power supply 108 , in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control1 . In another embodiment, LED driver circuit 140 adjusts the wavelength of light provided by LED sub-array 120 in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control1 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 140 is adjusted, in response to receiving control signal S Control1 , to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED sub-array 120 . It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED sub-array 120 to adjust the amount of power used by lighting system 100 f .
- the operation of a sensor such as sensors 211 a and/or 211 b is adjusted in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control1 . The operation of the sensor can be adjusted in many different ways, such as by turning the sensor on and off.
- antenna 210 b receives wireless signal S Wireless2 and, in response, communication module 212 a provides control signal S Control2 to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 141 is adjusted in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control2 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 141 can be adjusted in many different ways. For example, in some situations, LED driver circuit 141 is turned on and off, such as by turning on and off power supply 108 , in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control2 . In another embodiment, LED driver circuit 141 adjusts the wavelength of light provided by LED sub-array 121 in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control2 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 141 is adjusted, in response to receiving control signal S Control2 , to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED sub-array 121 . It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED sub-array 121 to adjust the amount of power used by lighting system 100 f .
- the operation of a sensor such as sensors 211 a and/or 211 b is adjusted in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control2 . The operation of the sensor can be adjusted in many different ways, such as by turning the sensor on and off.
- the sensor of lighting system 100 f senses a condition, such as a light condition or the physiological activity of the plant, and, in response, provides a sense signal to LED controller 130 .
- a condition such as a light condition or the physiological activity of the plant
- sensor 211 a is a light sensor which senses a wavelength of light and, in response, provides sense signal S Sense1 to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED sub-array 120 is adjusted by LED driver circuit 140 in response to LED controller 130 receiving sense signal S Sense1 .
- the operation of LED sub-array 120 is adjusted to adjust the wavelength of light provided by LED sub-array 120 .
- the operation of LED sub-array 120 is adjusted to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED sub-array 120 . It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED sub-array 120 to adjust the amount of power used by lighting system 100 f .
- sense signal S Sense1 is flowed through communication module 212 a and antenna 210 a as wireless signal S Wireless1 , wherein wireless signal S Wireless1 includes information corresponding to the wavelength of light sensed by sensor 211 a.
- sensor 211 b is a gas sensor which senses a type of gas proximate to lighting system 100 f and, in response, provides sense signal S Sense2 to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 141 is adjusted in response to LED controller 130 receiving sense signal S Sense2
- the operation of LED driver circuit 141 is adjusted to adjust the wavelength of light provided by LED sub-array 121 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 141 is adjusted to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED sub-array 121 . It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED sub-array 121 to adjust the amount of power used by lighting system 100 f .
- sense signal S Sense2 is flowed through communication module 212 b and antenna 210 c as wireless signal S Wireless2 , wherein wireless signal S Wireless2 includes information corresponding to the type of gas sensed by sensor 211 b.
- sensor 211 b is a photosynthesis meter which senses the plant stress level of a plant proximate to lighting system 100 f and, in response, provides sense signal S Sense2 to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 141 is adjusted in response to LED controller 130 receiving sense signal S Sense2
- the operation of LED driver circuit 141 is adjusted to adjust the wavelength of light provided by LED sub-array 121 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 141 is adjusted to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED sub-array 121 . It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED sub-array 121 to adjust the amount of power used by lighting system 100 f .
- sense signal S Sense2 is flowed through communication module 212 b and antenna 210 b as wireless signal S Wireless2 , wherein wireless signal S Wireless2 includes information corresponding to the plant stress level sensed by sensor 211 b.
- sensor 211 b is a gas analyzer which senses the type and/or amount of gas proximate to lighting system 100 f and, in response, provides sense signal S Sense2 to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 141 is adjusted in response to LED controller 130 receiving sense signal S Sense2
- the operation of LED driver circuit 141 is adjusted to adjust the wavelength of light provided by LED sub-array 121 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 141 is adjusted to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED sub-array 121 . It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED sub-array 121 to adjust the amount of power used by lighting system 100 f .
- sense signal S Sense2 is flowed through communication module 212 b and antenna 210 b as wireless signal S Wireless2 , wherein wireless signal S Wireless2 includes information corresponding to the type and/or amount of gas sensed by sensor 211 b.
- wireless signal S Wireless1 includes information corresponding to the growth season.
- Antenna 210 a receives wireless signal S Wireless1 and, in response, communication module 212 a provides control signal S Control1 to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 140 is adjusted in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control1 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 140 can be adjusted in many different ways. For example, in some situations, LED driver circuit 140 adjusts the wavelength of light provided by LED sub-array 120 in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control1 . In this way, the wavelength of light provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted in response to an indication of the growth season.
- LED driver circuit 140 adjusts the intensity of light provide by LED sub-array 120 in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control1 . It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED sub-array 120 to adjust the amount of power used by lighting system 100 f . In this way, the amount of power used by lighting system 100 f is adjustable in response to the indication of the growth season.
- the operation of the sensor such as sensors 211 a and/or 211 b , is adjusted in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control1 . In this way, the operation of sensors 211 a and/or 211 b is adjusted in response to the indication of the growth season.
- wireless signal S Wireless2 includes information corresponding to the growth season.
- Antenna 210 b receives wireless signal S Wireless2 and, in response, communication module 212 b provides control signal S Control2 to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 141 is adjusted in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control2 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 141 can be adjusted in many different ways. For example, in some situations, LED driver circuit 141 adjusts the wavelength of light provided by LED sub-array 121 in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control2 . In this way, the wavelength of light provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted in response to an indication of the growth season.
- LED driver circuit 141 adjusts the intensity of light provide by LED sub-array 121 in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control2 . It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided by LED sub-array 121 to adjust the amount of power used by lighting system 100 f . In this way, the amount of power used by lighting system 100 f is adjustable in response to the indication of the growth season.
- the operation of the sensor such as sensors 211 a and/or 211 b , is adjusted in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control2 . In this way, the operation of sensors 211 a and/or 211 b is adjusted in response to the indication of the growth season.
- wireless signal S Wireless1 includes information corresponding to a type of plant positioned proximate to lighting system 100 f .
- Antenna 210 a receives wireless signal S Wireless1 and, in response, communication module 212 a provides control signal S Control1 to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 140 is adjusted in response to receiving control signal S Control1 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 140 can be adjusted in many different ways. For example, in some situations, LED driver circuit 140 adjusts the wavelength of light provided by LED sub-array 120 in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control1 . In this way, the wavelength of light provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted in response to an indication of the type of plant positioned proximate to lighting system 100 f .
- the operation of the sensor is adjusted in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control1 .
- the operation of sensors 211 a and/or 211 b is adjusted in response to the indication of the type of plant positioned proximate to lighting system 100 f.
- wireless signal S Wireless2 includes information corresponding to a type of plant positioned proximate to lighting system 100 f .
- Antenna 210 b receives wireless signal S Wireless2 and, in response, communication module 212 b provides control signal S Control2 to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 141 is adjusted in response to receiving control signal S Control2 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 141 can be adjusted in many different ways. For example, in some situations, LED driver circuit 141 adjusts the wavelength of light provided by LED sub-array 121 in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control2 .
- the wavelength of light provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted in response to an indication of the type of plant positioned proximate to lighting system 100 f .
- the operation of the sensor such as sensors 211 a and/or 211 b , is adjusted in response to LED controller 130 receiving control signal S Control2 . In this way, the operation of sensors 211 a and/or 211 b is adjusted in response to the indication of the type of plant positioned proximate to lighting system 100 f.
- wireless signals S Wireless1 and S Wireless2 include information regarding first and second wavelength spectrums.
- LED sub-arrays 120 and 121 are capable of providing a desire wavelength spectrum, such as those shown in FIGS. 3 a , 3 b , 3 c , 4 a , 4 b , 4 c , 4 d , 4 e , 4 f , 4 g , 4 h and 4 i.
- Antenna 210 a receives wireless signal S Wireless1 and, in response, communication module 212 a provides control signal S Control1 to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 140 is adjusted in response to receiving control signal S Control1 .
- LED driver circuit 140 adjusts the wavelength of light provided by LED sub-array 120 to match the first wavelength spectrum. In this way, the wavelength of light provided by LED sub-array 120 is adjusted in response to wireless signal S Wireless1 .
- Antenna 210 b receives wireless signal S Wireless2 and, in response, communication module 212 b provides control signal S Control2 to LED controller 130 .
- the operation of LED driver circuit 141 is adjusted in response to receiving control signal S Control2 .
- LED driver circuit 141 adjusts the wavelength of light provided by LED sub-array 121 to match the first wavelength spectrum. In this way, the wavelength of light provided by LED sub-array 121 is adjusted in response to wireless signal S Wireless2 .
- the wavelength spectrums of wireless signals S Wireless1 and S Wireless2 can be adjusted with time.
- LED sub-array 120 provides the first wavelength spectrum and LED sub-array 121 provides the second wavelength spectrum.
- wireless signals S Wireless1 and S Wireless2 include information regarding third and fourth wavelength spectrums.
- LED sub-array 120 provides the third wavelength spectrum and LED sub-array 121 provides the fourth wavelength spectrum.
- the wavelength spectrums can be adjusted over more time periods, if desired.
- FIG. 13 a is a schematic diagram of one embodiment of a portion of lighting system 100 f of FIG. 12 b . It should be noted that some of the components of FIG. 13 a are also shown in FIG. 2 a , and are described in more detail with FIG. 2 a .
- sensor 211 a is embodied as a photodiode 214 a , wherein one terminal of photodiode 214 a is connected to current return 136 and another terminal of photodiode 214 a is connected to terminal 10 of LED driver chip 150 , wherein LED driver chip 150 is included with LED driver circuit 140 .
- LED driver chip 150 is embodied as the LT3477EFE chip manufactured by Linear Technology, Inc.
- Photodiode 214 a provides sense signal S Sense1 to terminal 10 in response to receiving incident light 169 a .
- Sense signal S Sense1 is adjustable in response to adjusting a parameter of incident light 169 a .
- the parameter of incident light 169 a can be of many different types of parameters, such as the intensity and/or wavelength of the light.
- the LT3477EFE chip is connected to electrical components, such as a resistor, inductor, capacitor and a Schottky diode, so that it operates as an LED driver. More information regarding the LT3477EFE chip, and how it is connected to the electrical components to operate as an LED driver, can be found in a corresponding Data Sheet provided by Linear Technology, Inc.
- communication module 212 a ( FIG. 12 b ) is connected to terminal 7 of LED driver chip 150 through a circuit that includes a diode, transistor, capacitor and resistor, as shown in FIG. 13 a . More information regarding the LT3477EFE chip, and how communication module 212 a is connected to the LT3477EFE chip can be found in a corresponding Data Sheet provided by Linear Technology, Inc. In this embodiment, the operation of LED 120 a is adjustable in response to adjusting control signal S Control1 .
- photodiode 214 a provides sense signal S Sense1 to terminal 10 in response to receiving incident light 169 a .
- the power of sense signal S Sense1 is adjustable in response to adjusting a parameter of incident light 169 a , such as its intensity and/or wavelength.
- LED driver circuit chip 150 adjusts the power of output signal S Output1 in response to the power of sense signal S Sense1 being adjusted, wherein the power of sense signal S Sense1 is adjusted in response to adjusting the intensity and/or wavelength of incident light 169 a .
- the intensity of blue light 162 emitted by LED 120 a increases in response to the amount of power of sense signal S Sense1 being increased by LED driver circuit chip 150 .
- the intensity of blue light 162 emitted by LED 120 a decreases in response to the amount of power of sense signal S Sense1 being decreased.
- FIG. 13 b is a schematic diagram of one embodiment of another portion of lighting system 100 f of FIG. 12 b . It should be noted that some of the components of FIG. 13 b are also shown in FIG. 2 b , and are described in more detail with FIG. 2 b .
- sensor 211 b is embodied as a photodiode 214 b , wherein one terminal of photodiode 214 b is connected to current return 136 and another terminal of photodiode 214 b is connected to terminal 10 of LED driver chip 151 , wherein LED driver chip 151 is included with LED driver circuit 141 .
- LED driver chip 151 is embodied as the LT3477EFE chip manufactured by Linear Technology, Inc.
- Photodiode 214 b provides sense signal S Sense2 to terminal 10 in response to receiving incident light 169 b .
- Sense signal S Sense2 is adjustable in response to adjusting a parameter of incident light 169 b .
- the parameter of incident light 169 b can be of many different types of parameters, such as the intensity and/or wavelength of the light.
- the LT3477EFE chip is connected to electrical components, such as a resistor, inductor, capacitor and a Schottky diode, so that it operates as an LED driver. More information regarding the LT3477EFE chip, and how it is connected to the electrical components to operate as an LED driver, can be found in a corresponding Data Sheet provided by Linear Technology, Inc.
- communication module 212 b ( FIG. 12 b ) is connected to terminal 7 of LED driver chip 151 through a circuit that includes a diode, transistor, capacitor and resistor, as shown in FIG. 13 b . More information regarding the LT3477EFE chip, and how communication module 212 b is connected to the LT3477EFE chip can be found in a corresponding Data Sheet provided by Linear Technology, Inc. In this embodiment, the operation of LED 121 a is adjustable in response to adjusting control signal S Control2 .
- photodiode 214 b provides sense signal S Sense2 to terminal 10 in response to receiving incident light 169 b .
- the power of sense signal S Sense2 is adjustable in response to adjusting a parameter of incident light 169 b , such as its intensity and/or wavelength.
- LED driver circuit chip 151 adjusts the power of output signal S Output2 in response to the power of sense signal S Sense2 being adjusted, wherein the power of sense signal S Sense2 is adjusted in response to adjusting the intensity and/or wavelength of incident light 169 b .
- the intensity of red light 166 emitted by LED 121 a increases in response to the amount of power of sense signal S Sense2 being increased by LED driver circuit chip 151 .
- the intensity of red light 166 emitted by LED 121 a decreases in response to the amount of power of sense signal S Sense2 being decreased.
- FIG. 14 a is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a portion of lighting system 100 f of FIG. 12 b . It should be noted that some of the components of FIG. 14 a are also shown in FIG. 2 a , and are described in more detail with FIG. 2 a .
- sensor 211 a is embodied as photodiode 214 a , wherein one terminal of photodiode 214 a is connected to current return 136 and another terminal of photodiode 214 a is connected to terminal 10 of LED driver chip 150 , wherein LED driver chip 150 is included with LED driver circuit 140 .
- LED driver chip 150 is embodied as the LT3477EFE chip manufactured by Linear Technology, Inc.
- Photodiode 214 a provides sense signal S Sense1 to terminal 10 in response to receiving incident light 169 a .
- Sense signal S Sense1 is adjustable in response to adjusting a parameter of incident light 169 a .
- the parameter of incident light 169 a can be of many different types of parameters, such as the intensity and/or wavelength of the light.
- the LT3477EFE chip is connected to electrical components, such as a resistor, inductor, capacitor and a Schottky diode, so that it operates as an LED driver. More information regarding the LT3477EFE chip, and how it is connected to the electrical components to operate as an LED driver, can be found in a corresponding Data Sheet provided by Linear Technology, Inc.
- a memory 213 a is connected to terminal 7 of LED driver chip 150 .
- Memory 213 a provides a memory signal S Mem1 to terminal 7 of LED driver chip 150 .
- memory 213 a is a digital memory capable of storing digital information.
- the operation of LED 120 a is adjustable in response to adjusting memory signal S Mem1 .
- communication module 212 a and antenna 212 a ( FIG. 12 b ) are in communication with memory 213 a .
- digital information memory 213 a flows between memory 213 a and communication module 212 a in control signal S Control1 .
- control signal S Control1 corresponds to wireless signal S Wireless1 so that the digital information can be flowed to and from memory 213 a wirelessly.
- the digital information can be of many different types.
- the digital information corresponds to a recipe that determines the operation of LED sub-array 120 .
- the recipe can selectively turn on and off the LEDs of LED sub-array 120 as a function of time, wherein the time can be over many different durations, such as a day, week, month and year, for example.
- the recipe stored with memory 213 a provides a light schedule, and determines the wavelength spectrums provided by the LEDs of LED sub-array 120 .
- selectively turning on and off the LEDs of LED sub-array 120 includes turning them all on and turning them all off.
- the lighting systems disclosed herein can be readily integrated with greenhouse control systems, such as Argus Controls, Wadsworth Control systems.
- the recipe can selectively turn on and off the LEDs of LED sub-array 120 to provide a desired wavelength spectrum. Examples of desired wavelength spectrums are shown in FIGS. 3 a , 3 b , 3 c , 4 a , 4 b , 4 c , 4 d , 4 e , 4 f , 4 g , 4 h and 4 i .
- LED sub-array 120 It is useful to turn off the LEDs of LED sub-array 120 when the accumulated light level for the day reaches a predetermined amount.
- lighting system 100 f will enable a user to set a threshold light level in response to the chosen plant type.
- the recipe stored with memory 213 a can be replaced with a different recipe.
- the recipe stored with memory 213 a can be replaced with a different recipe in many different ways, such as by adjusting control signal S Control1 .
- the recipe stored with memory 213 a is replaced by overwriting it another recipe.
- the recipe stored with memory 213 a is erased and replaced with another recipe.
- control signal S Control1 can be adjusted by adjusting wireless signal S Wireless1 .
- the recipe stored with memory 213 a can be replaced by with a different recipe in response to flowing a wireless signal to lighting system 100 f .
- the recipe stored with memory 213 a can be chosen to provide desired growth conditions for the desired plant type. In this way, lighting system 100 f can be used to effectively grow many different types of plants.
- FIG. 14 b is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a portion of lighting system 100 f of FIG. 12 b . It should be noted that some of the components of FIG. 14 b are also shown in FIG. 2 b , and are described in more detail with FIG. 2 b .
- sensor 211 b is embodied as photodiode 214 b , wherein one terminal of photodiode 214 b is connected to current return 136 and another terminal of photodiode 214 b is connected to terminal 10 of LED driver chip 151 , wherein LED driver chip 151 is included with LED driver circuit 141 .
- LED driver chip 151 is embodied as the LT3477EFE chip manufactured by Linear Technology, Inc.
- Photodiode 214 b provides sense signal S Sense2 to terminal 10 in response to receiving incident light 169 b .
- Sense signal S Sense2 is adjustable in response to adjusting a parameter of incident light 169 b .
- the parameter of incident light 169 b can be of many different types of parameters, such as the intensity and/or wavelength of the light.
- the LT3477EFE chip is connected to electrical components, such as a resistor, inductor, capacitor and a Schottky diode, so that it operates as an LED driver. More information regarding the LT3477EFE chip, and how it is connected to the electrical components to operate as an LED driver, can be found in a corresponding Data Sheet provided by Linear Technology, Inc.
- a memory 213 b is connected to terminal 7 of LED driver chip 151 .
- Memory 213 b provides a memory signal S Mem2 to terminal 7 of LED driver chip 151 .
- memory 213 b is a digital memory capable of storing digital information.
- the operation of LED 121 a is adjustable in response to adjusting memory signal S Mem2 .
- communication module 212 b and antenna 212 b ( FIG. 12 b ) are in communication with memory 213 b .
- digital information memory 213 b flows between memory 213 b and communication module 212 b in control signal S Control2 .
- control signal S Control2 corresponds to wireless signal S Wireless2 so that the digital information can be flowed to and from memory 213 b wirelessly.
- the digital information can be of many different types.
- the digital information corresponds to a recipe that determines the operation of LED sub-array 121 .
- the recipe can selectively turn on and off the LEDs of LED sub-array 121 as a function of time, wherein the time can be over many different durations, such as a day, week, month and year, for example.
- the recipe stored with memory 213 b provides a light schedule. It should be noted that selectively turning on and off the LEDs of LED sub-array 121 includes turning them all on and turning them all off.
- the recipe can selectively turn on and off the LEDs of LED sub-array 121 to provide a desired wavelength spectrum. Examples of desired wavelength spectrums are shown in FIGS. 3 a , 3 b , 3 c , 4 a , 4 b , 4 c , 4 d , 4 e , 4 f , 4 g , 4 h and 4 i . It is useful to turn off the LEDs of LED sub-array 121 when the accumulated light level for the day reaches a predetermined amount.
- LED arrays 120 and 121 can provide the same wavelength spectrum and different wavelength spectrums. Further the wavelengths spectrums provided by LED arrays 120 and 121 can be changed over time.
- the recipe stored with memory 213 b can be replaced with a different recipe.
- the recipe stored with memory 213 b can be replaced with a different recipe in many different ways, such as by adjusting control signal S Control2 .
- control signal S Control2 can be adjusted by adjusting wireless signal S Wireless1 .
- the recipe stored with memory 213 b can be replaced by with a different recipe in response to flowing a wireless signal to lighting system 100 f .
- the recipe stored with memory 213 b is replaced by overwriting it another recipe. Further, in some situations, the recipe stored with memory 213 b is erased and replaced with another recipe.
- the recipe stored with memory 213 b can be chosen to provide desired growth conditions for the desired plant type. In this way, lighting system 100 f can be used to effectively grow many different types of plants.
- memories 213 a and 213 b can store the same recipes and different recipes. Further the recipes stored by memories 213 a and 213 b can be changed over time.
- FIG. 15 is a block diagram of a portion of a lighting system 100 g , which can be included with the lighting systems discussed herein, such as lighting systems 100 d , 100 e and 100 f .
- the components of lighting system 100 g can be included with the components of FIGS. 13 a , 13 b , 14 a and 14 b , if desired.
- Lighting system 100 g includes an LED controller, such as LED controller 130 , but this is not shown in FIG. 15 for simplicity.
- Lighting system 100 g includes an LED array, such as LED arrays 102 and 103 , but this is not shown in FIG. 15 for simplicity.
- lighting system 100 g includes a computer module 215 in communication with an antenna 210 through a communication module 212 , so that computer module 215 receives a control signal S Control .
- Computer module 215 can include programmable logic controller 133 of FIG. 10 , and can be in communication with timer circuit 134 , if desired.
- Computer module 215 is carried by a housing of lighting system 100 g , such as lighting system housing 101 .
- control signal S Control can correspond to control signals S Control1 and S Control2 discussed above.
- antenna 210 can be antennas 210 a , 210 b and 210 c discussed above
- communication module 212 can be communication modules 212 a , 212 b and 212 c discussed above.
- computer module 215 is operatively coupled to an LED controller, such as LED controller 130 and provides control signal S Control3 thereto through terminal 7 of the LT3477EFE LED driver chip.
- the LED controller can include LED controllers 130 a and 130 b discussed above.
- Lighting system 100 g can include one or more sensors.
- lighting system 100 g includes sensor 211 b operatively coupled to computer module 215 so that sense signal S Sense2 flows between computer module 215 and sensor 211 b .
- lighting system 100 g includes sensor 211 a operatively coupled to computer module 215 through antenna 210 and communication module 212 , so that sense signal S Sense1 flows between computer module 215 and sensor 211 b .
- sense signal S Sense1 is a wireless signal which flows through a wireless link 217 g
- sense signal S Sense2 is a wired signal.
- sensors 211 a and/or 211 b can be positioned proximate to computer module 215 or remotely from computer module 215 .
- lighting system 100 g includes a memory 213 .
- Memory 213 can be memories 213 a and 213 b discussed above, if desired.
- Memory 213 stores information, such as information corresponding to a recipe.
- Lighting system 100 g can operate in many different ways.
- a first recipe is flowed to communication module 212 through antenna 210 , wherein wireless signal S Wireless corresponds to information of the first recipe.
- the information of the first recipe is flowed to computer module 215 as control signal S Control1 .
- Computer module 215 can store the first recipe to memory by flowing control signal S Control2 to memory 213 . Further, computer module 215 can flow the information of first recipe LED controller 130 (not shown) as control signal S Control3 .
- the LED array (not shown) of lighting system 100 g will be operated in accordance with the first recipe.
- a second recipe is flowed to communication module 212 through antenna 210 , wherein wireless signal S Wireless corresponds to information of the second recipe.
- the information of the second recipe is flowed to computer module 215 as control signal S Control1 .
- Computer module 215 can store the second recipe to memory by flowing control signal S Control2 to memory 213 . Further, computer module 215 can flow the information of second recipe LED controller 130 (not shown) as control signal S Control3 .
- the LED array (not shown) of lighting system 100 g will be operated in accordance with the second recipe.
- the first and second recipes are stored with memory 213 , so that computer module 215 can selectively choose one of the first and second recipes.
- the LED array is then operated in accordance with the chosen recipe.
- the first recipe is replaced by the second recipe.
- the first recipe can be overwritten by the second recipe so that the second recipe is stored with memory 213 and the first recipe is not.
- the first recipe is erased in response to a signal from computer module 215 , and then the second recipe is stored with memory 213 .
- FIG. 16 is a diagram of a lighting system network 107 .
- lighting system 107 can include the lighting systems discussed in more detail above.
- lighting system 107 includes a computer 215 .
- Computer 215 can be of many different types, such as a laptop computer and desktop computer, which operates in response to a program.
- Computer 215 can provide useful information regarding the operation of lighting system 107 .
- computer 215 can determine the power usage of lighting system 107
- computer 215 can provide power management and usage analysis. Usage analysis involves many different parameters, such as keeping track of how much light is provided by lighting system 107 , as well as the wavelength spectrum of the light provided.
- Computer 215 is capable of establishing a network connection, wherein the network connection allows the flow of information.
- the network connection can be of many different types, such as a wired network connection.
- computer 215 is capable of establishing a wireless network connection 217 b with a wireless network 216 .
- the network connection can be established in many different ways, such as by using an Ethernet card.
- Wireless network 216 can be of many different types, such as a Wi-Fi wireless network. It should be noted that wireless network 216 can include a portion of the Internet, if desired.
- lighting system 107 includes lighting system 100 d , which is discussed in more detail above with FIGS. 11 a -11 e .
- a network connection 217 b is established between computer 215 and lighting system 100 d .
- Network connection 217 b can be established between computer 215 and lighting system 100 d in many different ways.
- network connection 217 b is established by flowing a wireless signal between computer 215 and an antenna of lighting system 100 d.
- lighting system 107 includes lighting system 100 e , which is discussed in more detail above with FIG. 12 a .
- a network connection 217 c is established between computer 215 and lighting system 100 e .
- Network connection 217 c can be established between computer 215 and lighting system 100 e in many different ways.
- network connection 217 c is established by flowing wireless signal S Wireless1 between computer 215 and antenna 210 c of lighting system 100 e.
- lighting system 107 includes lighting system 100 f , which is discussed in more detail above with FIG. 12 b .
- a network connection 217 d is established between lighting system 100 d and lighting system 100 e .
- Network connection 217 d can be established between lighting system 100 d and lighting system 100 e in many different ways.
- network connection 217 d is established by flowing wireless signals S Wireless1 and S Wireless2 between lighting system 100 d and antenna 210 c of lighting system 100 e .
- lighting system 100 f can be in communication with computer 215 through lighting system 100 d and network connections 217 b and 217 d . In this way, computer 215 can control the operation of lighting systems 100 d and 100 f.
- lighting system 107 includes a lighting system 100 g , wherein lighting system 100 g includes a communication module and antenna, such as communication module 212 and antenna 210 .
- a network connection 217 e is established between wireless network 216 and lighting system 100 g .
- Network connection 217 e can be established between wireless network 216 and lighting system 100 g in many different ways.
- network connection 217 e is established by flowing a wireless signal between wireless network 216 and the communication module and antenna of lighting system 100 g .
- lighting system 100 g can be in communication with computer 215 through wireless network 216 , if desired. In this way, computer 215 can control the operation of lighting system 100 g .
- lighting system 100 g can be in communication with another lighting system through wireless network 216 .
- lighting systems 100 e and 100 g are in communication with each other through wireless network 216 and a network connection 217 g , wherein network connection 217 g is established between wireless network 216 and lighting system 100 e.
- lighting system 107 includes a lighting system 100 h , wherein lighting system 100 h includes a communication module and antenna, such as communication module 212 and antenna 210 .
- a network connection 217 f is established between lighting system 100 e and lighting system 100 h .
- Network connection 217 f can be established between lighting system 100 e and lighting system 100 h in many different ways.
- network connection 217 f is established by flowing a wireless signal between lighting system 100 e and the communication module and antenna of lighting system 100 h .
- lighting system 100 h can be in communication with computer 215 through lighting system 100 e and network connections 217 c and 217 f . In this way, computer 215 can control the operation of lighting systems 100 e and 100 h.
- Lighting system 107 can operate in many different ways, such as those discussed in more detail above with lighting systems 100 d , 100 e and 100 f .
- lighting systems 100 d , 100 e , 100 f , 100 g and 100 h include memory, and computer 215 flows a recipe to each memory.
- the recipe can be stored with computer 215 and selected using a program implemented by computer 215 .
- the recipe can be the same for each lighting module and the recipe can be different.
- the recipe flowed by computer 215 can change as a function of time, if desired.
- the time can be a day, week, month and year, if desired. In this way, the recipe can be changed as desired by the user of computer 215 .
- lighting systems 100 d , 100 e , 100 f , 100 g and 100 h each have the same recipe stored in the corresponding memory.
- lighting systems 100 d and 100 f have a first recipe stored in memory
- lighting systems 100 e , 100 g and 100 h have a second recipe stored in memory.
- the recipes are typically chosen based on the type of plant it is desired to grow. In this way, the recipes are chosen to provide a desired spectral balance of one or more lighting systems to adjust the light balance for a desired type of plant. It is useful to be able to adjust the recipes stored by lighting systems 100 d , 100 e , 100 f , 100 g and 100 h so that lighting system 107 can be used to illuminate different zones of a greenhouse.
- the lighting system allows the use of an external light sensor to provide light level data, the intensity of the light provided by the lighting system in a greenhouse can be adjusted to maintain desired light levels. For example, lights can be turned on when a cloud passes overhead, as sensed by a sensor, and turned off as soon as the sunlight has returned.
- Various embodiments of the lighting systems allow photoperiod control, which is used to schedule greenhouse crops such as chrysanthums, poinsettia, and other plants that respond to the day length factors.
- the software which runs on a computer that operates the lighting systems will simplify the planning and application of such light treatments.
- the lighting systems disclosed herein can alter plant morphology and regulate how plants grow through manipulation of the light spectrum. For example, by altering the levels of blue versus red in conjunction with a reduced Red/Far Red light ratio, more compact plant growth (shorter intermodal lengths) can be achieved. This can produce an effect to plant growth regulators (PGR's) without the actual application of the chemical PGR's.
- PGR's plant growth regulators
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Environmental Sciences (AREA)
- Botany (AREA)
- Biodiversity & Conservation Biology (AREA)
- Ecology (AREA)
- Forests & Forestry (AREA)
- Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
- Circuit Arrangement For Electric Light Sources In General (AREA)
- Led Device Packages (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Led Devices (AREA)
Abstract
Description
- This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/662,467, filed on Oct. 27, 2012, the contents of are incorporated by reference as though fully set forth herein.
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/662,467 is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/509,380, filed on Jul. 24, 2009 and issued on Oct. 30, 2012 as U.S. Pat. No. 8,297,782, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/083,499 filed on Jul. 24, 2008, the contents of both of which are incorporated by reference as though fully set forth herein.
- This invention relates generally to a lighting system which provides a plurality of colors.
- Some lighting systems for growing plants utilize gas-based lights and other lighting systems utilize light emitting diodes (LEDs). More information regarding lighting systems for growing plants can be found in U.S. Pat. No. 6,688,759 to Hadjimichael, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. Information regarding lighting systems that utilize LEDs can be found in U.S. Pat. No. 5,012,609 to Ignatius et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,278,432 to Ignatius et al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,474,838 to Fang et al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,602,275 to Sullivan, U.S. Pat. No. 6,921,182 to Anderson et al., U.S. Patent Application Nos. 20040189555 to Capen et al., 20070058368 to Partee et al., U.S. Patent Application No. 20110125296 to Bucove, et al., U.S. Patent Application No. 20050030538 to Jaffar and International Application No. PCT/CA2007/001096 to Tremblay et al., all of which are incorporated by reference as though fully set forth herein.
- There are many different manufacturers that use light emitting diodes for the growing of plants. Some of these manufacturers include Homegrown Lights, Inc., which provides the Procyon 100, SuperLED, which provides the LightBlaze 400, Sunshine Systems, which provides the GrowPanel Pro, Theoreme Innovation, Inc., which provides the TI SmartLamp, and HID Hut, Inc., which provides the LED UFO.
- However, it is desirable to provide a lighting system which allows the color of the emitted light to be better controlled.
- The present invention is directed to a lighting system for providing a desired color of light. The novel features of the invention are set forth with particularity in the appended claims. The invention will be best understood from the following description when read in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
-
FIG. 1a is a block diagram of a lighting system, which includes two inputs operatively coupled to an LED array through an LED controller. -
FIG. 1b is a more detailed block diagram of the lighting system ofFIG. 1 a. -
FIG. 1c is a more detailed front view of one embodiment of the LED array ofFIG. 1a , which includes two LED sub-arrays. -
FIG. 2a is a schematic diagram of one input ofFIG. 1a operatively coupled to one of the LED sub-arrays through an LED driver circuit, wherein the input operates as a potentiometer. -
FIG. 2b is a schematic diagram of the other input ofFIG. 1a operatively coupled to another of the LED sub-arrays through anotherLED driver circuit 141, wherein the other input operates as a potentiometer. -
FIG. 3a is a graph of a wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system ofFIG. 1 a. -
FIG. 3b is a graph of another wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system ofFIG. 1 a. -
FIG. 3c is a graph of a wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system ofFIG. 1a , wherein the wavelength spectrum includes color mixing. -
FIGS. 4a and 4b are graphs of wavelength spectra of light provided by the lighting system ofFIG. 1a , and action spectrum corresponding to chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b, respectively. -
FIGS. 4c and 4d are graphs of wavelength spectra of light provided by the lighting system ofFIG. 1a , and action spectrum corresponding to α-carotene. -
FIGS. 4e and 4f are graphs of wavelength spectra of light provided by the lighting system ofFIG. 1a , and action spectrum corresponding to β-carotene. -
FIG. 4g is a graph of wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system ofFIG. 1a , and action spectrum corresponding to pelargonin (Perlargonidin-3, 5-diglucoside). -
FIG. 4h is a graph of wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system ofFIG. 1a , and action spectrum corresponding to phycocyanin. -
FIG. 4i is a graph of wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system ofFIG. 1a , and action spectrum corresponding to phycoerythrin. -
FIGS. 5a and 5b are bottom and top perspective views, respectively, of an embodiment of a lighting system. -
FIGS. 5c and 5d are top and back perspective views of the lighting system ofFIGS. 5a and 5 b. -
FIG. 5e is a front perspective view of the lighting system ofFIGS. 5a and 5 b. -
FIG. 5f is a front view of a first LED array of the lighting system ofFIGS. 5a and 5b , wherein the first LED array includes five LED sub-arrays carried by an LED array support structure. -
FIG. 5g is a front view of a second LED array of the lighting system ofFIGS. 5a and 5b , wherein the second LED array includes five LED sub-arrays carried by an LED array support structure. -
FIGS. 6a and 6b are block diagram of the lighting system ofFIGS. 5a and 5b , which includes five inputs operatively coupled to the first and second LED arrays through an LED controller, wherein the LED controller includes first and second LED sub-controllers. -
FIGS. 7a, 7b, 7c, 7d and 7e are schematic diagrams of the inputs ofFIGS. 5a and 5b operatively coupled to the first LED sub-array through the first LED driver circuit, wherein the inputs operate as potentiometers. -
FIGS. 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d and 8e are schematic diagrams of the inputs ofFIGS. 5a and 5b operatively coupled to the second LED sub-array through the second LED driver circuit, wherein the inputs operate as potentiometers. -
FIGS. 9a, 9b and 9c are graphs of wavelength spectra of light provided by the lighting system ofFIGS. 5a and 5b , wherein the wavelength spectrum includes color mixing. -
FIG. 9d is a graph of a wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system ofFIGS. 5a and 5b , wherein, and the wavelength spectrum of chlorophyll a. -
FIG. 9e is a graph of a wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system ofFIGS. 5a and 5b , wherein, and the wavelength spectrum of α-carotene. -
FIG. 9f is a graph of a wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system ofFIGS. 5a and 5b , wherein, and the wavelength spectrum of pelargonin. -
FIG. 9g is a graph of a wavelength spectrum of light provided by the lighting system ofFIGS. 5a and 5b , wherein, and the wavelength spectrum of sunlight. -
FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a lighting system, which includes a programmable logic controller operatively coupled to an LED array through an LED controller. -
FIGS. 11a and 11b are bottom and top perspective views, respectively, of an embodiment of a lighting system. -
FIGS. 11c and 11d are top and back perspective views of the lighting system ofFIGS. 11a and 11 b. -
FIG. 11e is a front perspective view of the lighting system ofFIGS. 11a and 11 b. -
FIG. 12a is a block diagram of one embodiment of a lighting system. -
FIG. 12b is a block diagram of one embodiment of a lighting system. -
FIG. 13a is a schematic diagram of one embodiment of the lighting system ofFIG. 12 a. -
FIG. 13b is a schematic diagram of one embodiment of the lighting system ofFIG. 12 b. -
FIG. 14a is a schematic diagram of one embodiment of the lighting system ofFIG. 12a , which includes a memory. -
FIG. 14b is a schematic diagram of one embodiment of the lighting system ofFIG. 12b , which includes a memory. -
FIG. 15 is a block diagram of one embodiment of a lighting system, which includes a computer module. -
FIG. 16 is a diagram of a lighting system network, which includes a plurality of networked lighting systems. -
FIG. 1a is a block diagram of alighting system 100 a, which includesinputs LED array 102 through anLED controller 130.Lighting system 100 a includes apower supply 108 which provides a power signal SPower toLED controller 130 through apower terminal 108 a. -
LED array 102 includes two or more different types of LEDs, which are capable of emitting different wavelength spectrums of light. LEDs of the same type emit the same wavelength spectrums of light, and LEDs of different types emit different wavelength spectrum of light. A wavelength spectrum of light is the intensity of light emitted by the LED versus the wavelength of the light, and corresponds to a color of the light. The wavelengths spectrum of light can be determined in many different ways, such as with a spectrometer. Examples of wavelength spectrums of light are discussed in more detail below with the graphs shown inFIGS. 3a-3c andFIGS. 4a -4 i. - It should be noted that the conventions for the wavelengths of different colors of light vary widely. However, the wavelengths of light discussed herein will have the following ranges for ease of discussion:
-
- Ultraviolet light (UV): 40 nm to 380 nm;
- Violet light: 380 nm to 450 nm;
- Blue light: 450 nm to 495 nm;
- Green light 495 nm to 570 nm;
- Yellow light: 570 nm to 590 nm;
- Orange light: 590 nm to 620 nm;
- Red light: 620 nm to 750 nm; and
- Infrared light (IR): 750 nm to 2500 nm,
wherein the wavelengths above are in nanometers (nm).
- It should also be noted that there is typically some wavelength overlap between adjacent colors of light emitted by an LED. For example, wavelengths of blue and green light emitted by an LED typically overlap in a wavelength range of about 485 nanometers to about 505 nanometers. Further, wavelengths of blue and violet light emitted by an LED typically overlap in a wavelength range of about 440 nm to about 460 nm. In this way, the wavelength range of blue light is between about 450 nm to about 495 nm, and the wavelength range of green light is between about 495 nm to about 570 nm.
- It should be noted that an LED emits light in response to being activated, and an LED does not emit light in response to being deactivated. An LED is activated in response to driving a current through it to a current level above a threshold current level. Further, an LED is deactivated in response to driving a current through it to a current level below the threshold current level. In this embodiment, an LED of
LED array 102 is activated in response to receiving a signal fromLED controller 130, as will be discussed in more detail below. - It should be noted that the light emitted by two different types of LEDs of
LED array 102 are mixed together. In this way,lighting system 100 a provides color mixing. The light of the LEDs ofLED array 102 can be mixed together to provide a desired wavelength spectrum of light. - It should also be noted that the intensity of the light emitted by a single LED typically has a Gaussian wavelength distribution. However, some LEDs, such as those which provide white light, have intensities that have non-Gaussian wavelength distributions. An LED which provides white light and has an intensity having a non-Gaussian wavelength distribution will be discussed in more detail below with
FIG. 9 g. - The wavelength spectrum of the light emitted by an LED can be chosen in response to choosing the band gap energy of the semiconductor material of the LED. The band gap energy of the semiconductor material of the LED is typically chosen by choosing the semiconductor material composition. The semiconductor material composition can be chosen during growth. It should be noted that the wavelength distribution of the light emitted by an LED can be chosen in response to choosing the semiconductor material composition. The semiconductor materials included with different types of LEDs can be of many different types, several of which will be discussed in more detail presently.
- LEDs which emit IR light can include many different types of semiconductor materials, such as gallium arsenide and aluminum gallium arsenide. Further, LEDs which emit red light can include many different types of semiconductor materials, such as aluminum gallium arsenide, gallium arsenide phosphide, aluminum gallium indium phosphide and gallium phosphide.
- LEDs which emit orange light can include many different types of semiconductor materials, such as gallium arsenide phosphide, aluminum gallium indium phosphide and gallium phosphide. Further, LEDs which emit yellow light can include many different types of semiconductor materials, such as gallium arsenide phosphide, aluminum gallium indium phosphide and gallium phosphide.
- LEDs which emit green light can include many different types of semiconductor materials, such as indium gallium nitride/gallium nitride heterostructure, gallium phosphide, aluminum gallium indium phosphide and aluminum gallium phosphide. Further, LEDs which emit blue light can include many different types of semiconductor materials, such as zinc selenide and indium gallium nitride.
- LEDs which emit violet light can include many different types of semiconductor materials, such as indium gallium nitride. Further, LEDs which emit ultraviolet light can include many different types of semiconductor materials, such as aluminum nitride, aluminum gallium nitride, and aluminum gallium indium nitride.
- LEDs which emit purple light typically include a blue LED coated with a red phosphor or a white LED coated with a purple plastic. LEDs which emit white light can include a blue LED coated with a yellow phosphor.
- Hence, the LEDs of
LED array 102 can provide light having many different wavelength values, such as those mentioned above. The LEDs ofLED array 102 can be provided by many different manufacturers, such as Cree, Inc. of Durham, N.C. and Nichia Corporation of Tokyo, Japan. In this particular embodiment, however, the LEDs ofLED array 102 are provided by Philips Lumileds Lighting Company and are referred to as Luxeon-III light emitting diodes. - In operation,
power supply 108 provides power signal SPower toLED controller 130 throughpower terminal 108 a.LED controller 130 selectively controls the operation of the LEDs ofLED array 102 in response to an indication frominputs 110 and/or 111, as will be discussed in more detail below.LED controller 130 selectively controls the operation of the LEDs ofLED array 102 by controlling which types of LEDs are activated and deactivated. As mentioned above, activated LEDs emit light, and deactivated LEDs do not emit light. In this way,LED array 102 is capable of selectively emitting light of different wavelength ranges. - In one embodiment,
LED array 102 includes a first LED which emits red light and a second LED which emits blue light. In this embodiment,LED array 102 can provide red light, blue light and a mixture of red and blue light in response to adjustinginputs 110 and/or 111. - In another embodiment,
LED array 102 includes a first LED which emits violet light and a second LED which emits red light. In this embodiment,LED array 102 can provide violet light, red light and a mixture of violet and red light in response to adjustinginputs 110 and/or 111. - In one embodiment,
LED array 102 includes a first LED which emits violet light and a second LED which emits blue light. In this embodiment,LED array 102 can provide violet light, blue light and a mixture of violet and blue light in response to adjustinginputs 111 and/or 110. -
FIG. 1b is a more detailed block diagram oflighting system 100 a, andFIG. 1c is a more detailed front view of one embodiment ofLED array 102. In this embodiment,LED controller 130 includes anLED sub-controller 131, which is operatively coupled toinputs LED array 102. In particular,LED sub-controller 131 includesLED driver circuits LED array 102 includesLED sub-arrays Input 110 is operatively coupled toLED sub-array 120 throughLED driver circuit 140, andinput 111 is operatively coupled toLED sub-array 121 throughLED driver circuit 141. In this way,inputs LED array 102 throughLED controller 130. - In this embodiment,
LED array 102 includes an LED array support structure 106 a which carriesLED sub-arrays LED sub-array 120 includes one or more LEDs of the same type. Further, in this embodiment,LED sub-array 121 includes one or more LEDs of the same type. The LEDs ofLED sub-array 120 are denoted asLEDs 120 a, and the LEDs ofLED sub-array 121 are denoted asLEDs 121 a. In this embodiment, and for illustrative purposes,LEDs 120 a is capable of emittingblue light 162 andLEDs 121 a is capable of emittingred light 166. It should be noted that, in general,LED array 102 includes one or more LED sub-arrays. However, two LED sub-arrays are shown inFIG. 1c for simplicity and ease of discussion. An embodiment in whichLED array 102 includes five LED sub-arrays will be discussed in more detail below. - In operation, power supply 108 (
FIG. 1a ) provides power signal SPower toLED driver circuits power terminal 108 a (FIG. 1a ).Input 110 provides an input signal SInput1 toLED driver circuit 140 and, in response,LED driver circuit 140 provides an output signal SOutput1 toLED sub-array 120. Further,input 111 provides an input signal SInput2 toLED driver circuit 141 and, in response,LED driver circuit 141 provides an output signal SOutput2 toLED sub-array 121. - In some embodiments,
input 110 operates as a switch, which is repeatably moveable between active and deactive conditions. In some situations,input 110 is activated so that input signal SInput2 provides an indication toLED driver circuit 140 that it is desirable to activate the LEDs ofLED sub-array 120. In response to the indication that it is desirable to activate the LEDs ofLED sub-array 120,LED driver circuit 140 provides output signal SOutput1 toLED sub-array 120, andLEDs 120 a are activated so they emit light. - In some situations,
input 110 is deactivated so that input signal SInput1 provides an indication toLED driver circuit 140 that it is desirable to deactivate the LEDs ofLED sub-array 120. In response to the indication that it is desirable to deactivate the LEDs ofLED sub-array 120,LED driver circuit 140 provides output signal SOutput1 toLED sub-array 120, andLEDs 120 a are deactivated so they do not emitblue light 162. - In some embodiments,
input 111 operates as a switch, which is repeatably moveable between active and deactive conditions. In some situations,input 111 is activated so that input signal SInput2 provides an indication toLED driver circuit 141 that it is desirable to activate the LEDs ofLED sub-array 121. In response to the indication that it is desirable to activate the LEDs ofLED sub-array 121,LED driver circuit 141 provides output signal SOutput2 toLED sub-array 121, andLEDs 121 a are activated so they emitred light 166. - In some situations,
input 111 is deactivated so that input signal SInput2 provides an indication toLED driver circuit 141 that it is desirable to deactivate the LEDs ofLED sub-array 121. In response to the indication that it is desirable to deactivate the LEDs ofLED sub-array 121,LED driver circuit 141 provides output signal SOutput2 toLED sub-array 121, andLEDs 121 a are deactivated so they do not emitred light 166. In this way,LED array 102 is capable of selectively emitting light of different wavelength ranges. -
FIG. 2a is a schematic diagram of one embodiment ofinput 110 operatively coupled toLED sub-array 120 throughLED driver circuit 140, whereininput 110 operates as a potentiometer. In this embodiment,input 110 includes apotentiometer 137 a, which is connected betweenpower terminal 108 a and acurrent return 136.LED driver circuit 140 includes anLED driver chip 150, which is embodied as an LT3477EFE chip manufactured by Linear Technology, Inc. of Milpitas, Calif. The LT3477EFE chip is connected to electrical components, such as a resistor, inductor, capacitor and a Schottky diode, so that it operates as an LED driver. More information regarding the LT3477EFE chip, and how it is connected to the electrical components to operate as an LED driver, can be found in a corresponding Data Sheet provided by Linear Technology, Inc. Another chip that can be used is the LM3409 HV chip manufactured by National Semiconductors and Texas Instruments. More information regarding the LM3409 HV chip, and how it is connected to the electrical components to operate as an LED driver, can be found in a corresponding Data Sheet provided by National Semiconductors and Texas Instruments. - In this embodiment,
power terminal 108 a is connected toterminals LED sub-array 120. In particular,terminal 14 of the LT3477EFE chip provides output signal SOutput1 toLED 120 a. - In operation, the power of input signal SInput1 is adjustable in response to adjusting
potentiometer 137 a. In one situation, the power of input signal SInput1 is increased in response to adjustingpotentiometer 137 a. LEDdriver circuit chip 150 increases the power of output signal SOutput1 in response to the power of input signal SInput1 being increased bypotentiometer 137 a. The intensity ofblue light 162 emitted byLED 120 a increases in response to the amount of power of output signal SOutput1 being increased by LEDdriver circuit chip 150. - In another situation, the power of input signal SInput1 is decreased in response to adjusting
potentiometer 137 a. LEDdriver circuit chip 150 decreases the power of output signal SOutput1 in response to the power of input signal SInput1 being decreased bypotentiometer 137 a. The intensity ofblue light 162 emitted byLED 120 a decreases in response to the amount of power of output signal SOutput1 being decreased by LEDdriver circuit chip 150. -
FIG. 2b is a schematic diagram of one embodiment ofinput 111 operatively coupled toLED sub-array 121 throughLED driver circuit 141, whereininput 111 operates as a potentiometer. In this embodiment,input 111 is embodied as apotentiometer 137 b, which is connected betweenpower terminal 108 a andcurrent return 136.LED driver circuit 141 includes anLED driver chip 151, which is embodied as the LT3477EFE chip described in more detail above. The LT3477EFE chip ofLED driver chip 151 is connected to electrical components, such as a resistor, inductor, capacitor and a Schottky diode, so that it operates as an LED driver. - In this embodiment,
power terminal 108 a is connected toterminals LED sub-array 121. In particular,terminal 14 of the LT3477EFE chip provides output signal SOutput2 toLED 121 a. - In operation, the power of input signal SInput2 is adjustable in response to adjusting
potentiometer 137 b. In one situation, the power of input signal SInput2 is increased in response to adjustingpotentiometer 137 b. LEDdriver circuit chip 151 increases the power of output signal SOutput2 in response to the power of input signal SInput2 being increased bypotentiometer 137 b. The intensity ofred light 166 emitted byLED 121 a increases in response to the amount of power of output signal SOutput2 being increased by LEDdriver circuit chip 151. - In another situation, the power of input signal SInput2 is decreased in response to adjusting
potentiometer 137 b. LEDdriver circuit chip 151 decreases the power of output signal SOutput2 in response to the power of input signal SInput2 being decreased bypotentiometer 137 b. The intensity ofred light 166 emitted byLED 121 a decreases in response to the amount of power of output signal SOutput2 being decreased by LEDdriver circuit chip 151. -
FIG. 3a is a graph of awavelength spectrum 180 of light provided bylighting system 100 a. InFIG. 3a ,wavelength spectrum 180 corresponds to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm). The intensity of light is denoted as I1, I2, I3 and I4, wherein I1 is less than I2, I2 is less than I3 and I3 is less than I4. The intensity of light can be determined in many different ways, such as by using a spectrometer. - In this situation,
input 110 provides signal SInput1 to LED driver circuit 140 (FIGS. 1b and 2a ), andLED driver circuit 140 provides signal SOutput1 toLED sub-array 120, whereinLED sub-array 120 includes LED 120 a. In this particular example,LED 120 a is an LED that emitsblue light 162 when activated. As shown inFIG. 3a ,blue light 162 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 180 a between about 450 nm and 495 nm. In some examples,blue light 162 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 180 a between about 475 nm and 500 nm. In some examples,blue light 162 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 180 a between about 450 nm and 475 nm. It should be noted that the intensity ofblue light 162 ofwavelength spectrum 180 can be adjusted in many different ways, several of which will be discussed in more detail presently. - As mentioned above, in some embodiments,
input 110 operates as a switch which is repeatably moveable between activated and deactivated conditions. In these embodiments, the intensity ofblue light 162 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjustable in response to adjusting the number ofLEDs 120 a. For example, the intensity ofblue light 162 decreases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 180 b, in response to decreasing the number ofLEDs 120 a ofLED sub-array 120. Further, the intensity ofblue light 162 increases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 180 c, in response to increasing the number ofLEDs 120 a ofLED sub-array 120. - Further, in other embodiments,
input 110 includespotentiometer 137 a. In some situations,potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 are decreased, as discussed above withFIG. 2a . The intensity ofblue light 162 decreases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 180 b, in response to decreasing the power of input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 withpotentiometer 137 a. - In some situations,
potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 are increased, as discussed above withFIG. 2a . The intensity ofblue light 162 increases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 180 c, in response to increasing the power of input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 withpotentiometer 137 a. -
FIG. 3b is a graph of awavelength spectrum 181 of light provided bylighting system 100 a. InFIG. 3b ,wavelength spectrum 181 corresponds to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above withwavelength spectrum 180. - In this situation,
input 111 provides signal SInput1 to LED driver circuit 141 (FIGS. 1b and 2b ), andLED driver circuit 141 provides signal SOutput1 toLED sub-array 121, whereinLED sub-array 121 includes LED 121 a. In this particular example,LED 121 a is an LED that emitsred light 166 when activated. As shown inFIG. 3b ,red light 166 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 181 a between about 650 nm and 750 nm. In some examples,red light 166 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 181 a between about 620 nm and 670 nm. In some examples,red light 166 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 181 a between about 700 nm and 750 nm. It should be noted that the intensity ofred light 166 ofwavelength spectrum 181 can be adjusted in many different ways, several of which will be discussed in more detail presently. - As mentioned above, in some embodiments,
input 111 operates as a switch which is repeatably moveable between activated and deactivated conditions. In these embodiments, the intensity ofred light 166 provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjustable in response to adjusting the number ofLEDs 121 a. For example, the intensity ofred light 166 decreases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 181 b, in response to decreasing the number ofLEDs 121 a ofLED sub-array 121. Further, the intensity ofred light 166 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 181 c, in response to increasing the number ofLEDs 121 a ofLED sub-array 121. - Further, in other embodiments,
input 111 includespotentiometer 137 b. In some situations,potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 are decreased, as discussed above withFIG. 2b . The intensity ofred light 166 decreases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 181 b, in response to decreasing the power of input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 withpotentiometer 137 b. - In some situations,
potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 are increased, as discussed above withFIG. 2b . The intensity ofred light 166 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 181 c, in response to increasing the power of input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 withpotentiometer 137 b. - As mentioned above,
lighting system 100 a can provide color mixing whenLED array 102 includes different types of LEDs. An example of a wavelength spectrum with color mixing will be discussed in more detail presently. -
FIG. 3c is a graph of awavelength spectrum 182 of light provided bylighting system 100 a, whereinwavelength spectrum 182 includes color mixing. InFIG. 3c ,wavelength spectrum 182 corresponds to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above withwavelength spectrum 180. As shown inFIG. 3c ,blue light 162 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 180 a between about 450 nm and 500 nm, andred light 166 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 181 a between about 650 nm and 750 nm.Lighting system 100 a can providewavelength spectrum 182 with color mixing in many different ways. - In one embodiment,
inputs blue light 162 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjustable in response to adjusting the number ofLEDs 120 a. For example, the intensity ofblue light 162 decreases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 180 b, in response to decreasing the number ofLEDs 120 a ofLED sub-array 120. Further, the intensity ofblue light 162 increases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 180 c, in response to increasing the number ofLEDs 120 a ofLED sub-array 120. - In these embodiments, the intensity of
red light 166 provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjustable in response to adjusting the number ofLEDs 121 a. For example, the intensity ofred light 166 decreases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 181 b, in response to decreasing the number ofLEDs 121 a ofLED sub-array 121. Further, the intensity ofred light 166 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 181 c, in response to increasing the number ofLEDs 121 a ofLED sub-array 121. - It should be noted that the relative intensities of
blue light 162 andred light 166 provided bylighting system 100 a can be adjusted relative to each other in response to adjusting the number ofLEDs 120 a ofLED sub-array 120 and the number ofLEDs 121 a ofLED sub-array 121. The relative intensities ofblue light 162 andred light 166 can be adjusted in many different ways. - For example, in one situation, the number of
LEDs 120 a can be increased relative to the number ofLEDs 121 a, so thatwavelength spectrum 180 c andwavelength spectrum 181 b are provided by LED sub-arrays 120 and 121, respectively. In this way, the amount ofblue light 162 andred light 166 provided bylighting system 100 a is increased relative to the amount ofred light 166. Further, the number ofLEDs 121 a can be decreased relative to the number ofLEDs 120 a, so thatwavelength spectrum 180 c andwavelength spectrum 181 b are provided by LED sub-arrays 120 and 121, respectively. In this way, the amount ofblue light 162 andred light 166 provided bylighting system 100 a is decreased relative to the amount ofred light 166. In this way,lighting system 100 a is capable of providing a desired mixture of blue and red light. - In other embodiments,
inputs potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 are decreased, as discussed above withFIG. 2a . The intensity ofblue light 162 decreases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 180 b, in response to decreasing the power of input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 withpotentiometer 137 a. - In some situations,
potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 are increased, as discussed above withFIG. 2a . The intensity ofblue light 162 increases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 180 c, in response to increasing the power of input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 withpotentiometer 137 a. - In some situations,
potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 are decreased, as discussed above withFIG. 2b . The intensity ofred light 166 decreases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 181 b, in response to decreasing the power of input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 withpotentiometer 137 b. - In some situations,
potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 are increased, as discussed above withFIG. 2b . The intensity ofred light 166 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 181 c, in response to increasing the power of input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 withpotentiometer 137 b. - It should be noted that the relative intensities of
blue light 162 andred light 166 can be adjusted relative to each other in response to adjusting potentiometers 136 a and/or 136 b. The relative intensities ofblue light 162 andred light 166 can be adjusted in many different ways by adjusting potentiometers 136 a and 136 b. - For example, in some situations, it may be desirable to provide more
blue light 162 and lessred light 166 withlighting system 100 a. In this situation,potentiometer 137 a is adjusted, as described above, so that input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 have more power, andwavelength spectrum 180 c is provided byLED sub-array 120. Further,potentiometer 137 b is adjusted, as described above, so that input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 have less power, andwavelength spectrum 181 b is provided byLED sub-array 121. In this way,lighting system 100 a provides moreblue light 162 and lessred light 166. - In some situations, the intensity of
red light 166 is about one order of magnitude greater than the intensity ofblue light 162. In another situation, the intensity ofred light 166 is about ten to about fifteen times greater than the intensity ofblue light 162. In another situation, the intensity ofred light 166 is about eight to thirteen times greater than the intensity ofblue light 162. In general, the intensity ofred light 166 is a desired amount greater than the intensity ofblue light 162. - In some situations, the intensity of
blue light 162 is about one order of magnitude greater than the intensity ofred light 166. In another situation, the intensity ofblue light 162 is about ten to about fifteen times greater than the intensity ofred light 166. In another situation, the intensity ofblue light 162 is about eight to thirteen times greater than the intensity ofred light 166. In general, the intensity ofblue light 162 is a desired amount greater than the intensity ofred light 166. - In another situation, it may be desirable to provide less
blue light 162 and morered light 166 withlighting system 100 a. In this situation,potentiometer 137 a is adjusted, as described above, so that input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 have less power, andwavelength spectrum 180 b is provided byLED sub-array 120. Further,potentiometer 137 b is adjusted, as described above, so that input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 have more power, and wavelength spectrum 181 c is provided byLED sub-array 121. In this way,lighting system 100 a provides lessblue light 162 and morered light 166. It should be noted that the desired mixture of light provided bylighting system 100 a can be chosen to correspond to an action spectrum of a physiological activity of a plant, as will be discussed in more detail presently. -
FIGS. 4a and 4b are graphs ofwavelength spectrum lighting system 100 a. Action spectrum corresponding to chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b are also shown inFIGS. 4a and 4b , respectively. InFIGS. 4a and 4b ,wavelength spectrums wavelength spectrum 180. - It should be noted that the action spectrum of chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b of
FIGS. 4a and 4b , respectively, as well as the other action spectra discussed herein, are from a book entitled Introduction to Plant Physiology, 2nd Edition, by William G. Hopkins, which was published in 1999 by John Wiley & Sons. An action spectrum is the rate of a physiological activity versus the wavelength of light received by a plant. An action spectrum illustrates which wavelengths of light are effective in driving the physiological activity, wherein the physiological activity corresponds to a chemical reaction of the plant. The physiological activity of the plant can be of many different types, such as the chemical reactions associated with photosynthesis and cellular respiration. The wavelengths of light that are effective in driving the physiological activity of the plant depends on the types of pigments the plant includes. - Plants can include many different types of pigments, such as chlorophylls, carotenoids and phycobilins. There are many different types of chlorophylls, such as chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b. Further, there are many different types of carotenoids, such as xanthophylls and carotenes. There are many different types of carotenes, such as α-carotene and β-carotene. There are many different types of phycobilins, such as pelargonidin, phycocyanin, phycoerythrin, phytochrome and anthocyanins, among others. It should also be noted that the action spectrum of chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b is similar to the action spectrum of other chemicals, such as those associated with leaf extract.
- For example, the red and blue-violet spectrums of light are effective in driving the physiological activity of photosynthesis of chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b. Hence, the action spectrum corresponding to chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b are non-zero in a range of wavelengths that include red and blue-violet light. In this way, the rate of photosynthesis of chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b increases in response to receiving more red and blue-violet light. Further, the rate of photosynthesis of chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b decreases in response to receiving less red and blue-violet light.
- In the situation of
FIG. 4a ,input 110 provides signal SInput1 toLED driver circuit 140, andLED driver circuit 140 provides signal SOutput1 toLED sub-array 120, whereinLED sub-array 120 includes LED 120 a. In this particular example,LED 120 a is an LED that emitsviolet light 161 when activated. As shown inFIG. 4a ,violet light 161 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 183 a between about 400 nm and 450 nm. In some examples,violet light 161 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 183 a between about 380 nm and 425 nm. In some examples,violet light 161 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 183 a between about 425 nm and 450 nm. - Further, in this situation,
input 111 provides signal SInput2 toLED driver circuit 141, andLED driver circuit 141 provides signal SOutput2 toLED sub-array 121, whereinLED sub-array 121 includes LED 121 a. In this particular example,LED 121 a is an LED that emitsred light 166 when activated. As shown inFIG. 4a ,red light 166 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 183 b between about 650 nm and 675 nm. In this way,lighting system 100 a is capable of providing a wavelength spectrum which corresponds to the action spectrum of chlorophyll a whenlighting system 100 a includes LEDs capable of emittingviolet light 161 andred light 166. - As mentioned above, the intensity of the light provided by the different types of LEDs of
lighting system 100 a are adjustable relative to each other. In one embodiment,inputs violet light 161 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting the number ofLEDs 120 a. Further, the intensity ofred light 166 provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting the number ofLEDs 121 a. - In another embodiment,
input 110 includespotentiometer 137 a, so that the intensity ofviolet light 161 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjustingpotentiometer 137 a, as described in more detail above. Further,input 111 includespotentiometer 137 b, so that the intensity ofred light 166 provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjustingpotentiometer 137 b, as described in more detail above. It should be noted that the relative intensities ofviolet light 161 andred light 166 can be adjusted relative to each other in response to adjusting potentiometers 136 a and 136 b. In some situations, the intensity ofred light 166 is about ten to about fifteen times greater than the intensity ofviolet light 161. - In the situation of
FIG. 4b ,input 110 provides signal SInput1 toLED driver circuit 140, andLED driver circuit 140 provides signal SOutput1 toLED sub-array 120, whereinLED sub-array 120 includes LED 120 a. In this particular example,LED 120 a is an LED that emits blue-violet light 170 when activated. As shown inFIG. 4b , blue-violet light 170 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 184 a between about 400 nm and 475 nm. In some examples, blue-violet light 170 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 184 a between about 450 nm and 500 nm. - Further, in this situation,
input 111 provides signal SInput2 toLED driver circuit 141, andLED driver circuit 141 provides signal SOutput2 toLED sub-array 121, whereinLED sub-array 121 includes LED 121 a. In this particular example,LED 121 a is an LED that emitsred light 166 when activated. As shown inFIG. 4b ,red light 166 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 184 b between about 625 nm and 675 nm. In this way,lighting system 100 a is capable of providing a wavelength spectrum which corresponds to the action spectrum of chlorophyll b whenlighting system 100 a includes LEDs capable of emitting blue-violet light 170 andred light 166. - As mentioned above, the intensity of the light provided by the different types of LEDs of
lighting system 100 a are adjustable relative to each other. In one embodiment,inputs violet light 170 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting the number ofLEDs 120 a. Further, the intensity ofred light 166 provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting the number ofLEDs 121 a. - In another embodiment,
input 110 includespotentiometer 137 a, so that the intensity of blue-violet light 170 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjustingpotentiometer 137 a, as described in more detail above. Further,input 111 includespotentiometer 137 b, so that the intensity ofred light 166 provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjustingpotentiometer 137 b, as described in more detail above. It should be noted that the relative intensities of blue-violet light 170 andred light 166 can be adjusted relative to each other in response to adjusting potentiometers 136 a and 136 b. - In general, the types of LEDs of
lighting system 100 a are chosen so thatlighting system 100 a can provide a wavelength spectrum which drives the physiological activity of a desired type of plant. Hence,lighting system 100 a can provide wavelength spectra useful for plants which have action spectrum different from chlorophyll a and chlorophyll b, as will be discussed in more detail presently. -
FIGS. 4c and 4d are graphs ofwavelength spectrum lighting system 100 a. Action spectrum corresponding to α-carotene are also shown inFIGS. 4c and 4d .FIGS. 4e and 4f are graphs ofwavelength spectrum lighting system 100 a. Action spectrum corresponding to β-carotene are also shown inFIGS. 4e and 4f . InFIGS. 4c, 4d, 4e and 4f , the wavelength spectrums correspond to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above withwavelength spectrum 180. - The physiological activity of α-carotene and β-carotene is effectively driven by wavelengths of blue-violet light. Hence, the action spectrum corresponding to α-carotene and β-carotene are non-zero in a range of wavelengths that include blue and violet light. In this way, the rate of physiological activity of α-carotene and β-carotene increases in response to receiving more blue-violet light. Further, the rate of physiological activity of α-carotene and β-carotene decreases in response to receiving less blue-violet light.
- In the situation of
FIG. 4c ,input 110 provides signal SInput1 toLED driver circuit 140, andLED driver circuit 140 provides signal SOutput1 toLED sub-array 120, whereinLED sub-array 120 includes LED 120 a. In this particular example,LED 120 a is an LED that emitsviolet light 161 when activated. As shown inFIG. 4c ,violet light 161 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 185 a between about 400 nm and 450 nm. - Further, in this situation,
input 111 provides signal SInput2 toLED driver circuit 141, andLED driver circuit 141 provides signal SOutput2 toLED sub-array 121, whereinLED sub-array 121 includes LED 121 a. In this particular example,LED 121 a is an LED that emitsblue light 162 when activated. As shown inFIG. 4c ,blue light 162 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 185 b between about 425 nm and 475 nm. In this way,lighting system 100 a is capable of providing a wavelength spectrum which corresponds to the action spectrum of α-carotene whenlighting system 100 a includes LEDs capable of emittingviolet light 161 andblue light 162. - As mentioned above, the intensity of the light provided by the different types of LEDs of
lighting system 100 a are adjustable relative to each other. In one embodiment,inputs violet light 161 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting the number ofLEDs 120 a. Further, the intensity ofblue light 162 provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting the number ofLEDs 121 a. - In another embodiment,
input 110 includespotentiometer 137 a, so that the intensity ofviolet light 161 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjustingpotentiometer 137 a, as described in more detail above. Further,input 111 includespotentiometer 137 b, so that the intensity ofblue light 162 provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjustingpotentiometer 137 b, as described in more detail above. It should be noted that the relative intensities ofviolet light 161 andblue light 162 can be adjusted relative to each other in response to adjusting potentiometers 136 a and 136 b. It should also be noted that the physiological activity of α-carotene can be driven in response to the light from one type of LED, as will be discussed in more detail presently. - In the situation of
FIG. 4d ,input 110 provides signal SInput1 toLED driver circuit 140, andLED driver circuit 140 provides signal SOutput1 toLED sub-array 120, whereinLED sub-array 120 includes LED 120 a. In this particular example,LED 120 a is an LED that emits blue-violet light 170 when activated. As shown inFIG. 4d , blue-violet light 170 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 186 a between about 400 nm and 500 nm. In this way,LED 120 a provides blue-violet light 170 which has a broader spectrum than the spectrum ofviolet light 161FIG. 4c . Further,LED 120 a provides blue-violet light 170 which has a broader spectrum than the spectrum ofblue light 162FIG. 4c . As mentioned above, the wavelength distribution of light provided by an LED can be made broader and narrower in many different ways, such as by choosing the semiconductor material composition of the LED. - Further, in this situation,
input 111 provides input signal SInput2 toLED driver circuit 141, andLED driver circuit 141 provides output signal SOutput2 toLED sub-array 121, whereinLED sub-array 121 includes LED 121 a. In this particular example,LED 121 a is deactivated in response to receiving output signal SOutput2. In this way, the physiological activity of α-carotene is driven in response to the light from one type of LED. - In one embodiment,
inputs violet light 170 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting the number ofLEDs 120 a. Further, the intensity ofblue light 162 provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted by deactivatingLEDs 121 a. - In another embodiment,
input 110 includespotentiometer 137 a, so that the intensity of blue-violet light 170 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjustingpotentiometer 137 a, as described in more detail above. Further,input 111 includespotentiometer 137 b, so that the intensity ofblue light 162 provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjustingpotentiometer 137 b so that output signal SOutput2 deactivatesLEDs 121 a. - In the situation of
FIG. 4e ,input 110 provides signal SInput1 toLED driver circuit 140, andLED driver circuit 140 provides signal SOutput1 toLED sub-array 120, whereinLED sub-array 120 includes LED 120 a. In this particular example,LED 120 a is an LED that emits blue-violet light 170 when activated. As shown inFIG. 4e , blue-violet light 170 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 187 a between about 425 nm and 475 nm. - Further, in this situation,
input 111 provides signal SInput2 toLED driver circuit 141, andLED driver circuit 141 provides signal SOutput2 toLED sub-array 121, whereinLED sub-array 121 includes LED 121 a. In this particular example,LED 121 a is an LED that emitsblue light 162 when activated. As shown inFIG. 4e ,blue light 162 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 187 b between about 425 nm and 475 nm. In this way,lighting system 100 a is capable of providing a wavelength spectrum which corresponds to the action spectrum of β-carotene whenlighting system 100 a includes LEDs capable of emitting blue-violet light 170 andblue light 162. - As mentioned above, the intensity of the light provided by the different types of LEDs of
lighting system 100 a are adjustable relative to each other. In one embodiment,inputs violet light 170 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting the number ofLEDs 120 a. Further, the intensity ofblue light 162 provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting the number ofLEDs 121 a. - In another embodiment,
input 110 includespotentiometer 137 a, so that the intensity of blue-violet light 170 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjustingpotentiometer 137 a, as described in more detail above. Further,input 111 includespotentiometer 137 b, so that the intensity ofblue light 162 provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjustingpotentiometer 137 b, as described in more detail above. It should be noted that the relative intensities of blue-violet light 170 andblue light 162 can be adjusted relative to each other in response to adjusting potentiometers 136 a and 136 b. It should also be noted that the physiological activity of β-carotene can be driven in response to the light from one type of LED, as will be discussed in more detail presently. - In the situation of
FIG. 4f ,input 110 provides signal SInput1 toLED driver circuit 140, andLED driver circuit 140 provides signal SOutput1 toLED sub-array 120, whereinLED sub-array 120 includes LED 120 a. In this particular example,LED 120 a is an LED that emits blue-violet light 170 when activated. As shown inFIG. 4f , blue-violet light 170 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 188 a between about 400 nm and 500 nm. In this way,LED 120 a provides blue-violet light 170 which has a broader spectrum than the spectrum ofviolet light 161FIG. 4e . Further,LED 120 a provides blue-violet light 170 which has a broader spectrum than the spectrum ofblue light 162FIG. 4e . As mentioned above, the wavelength distribution of light provided by an LED can be made broader and narrower in many different ways, such as by choosing the semiconductor material composition of the LED. - Further, in this situation,
input 111 provides input signal SInput2 toLED driver circuit 141, andLED driver circuit 141 provides output signal SOutput2 toLED sub-array 121, whereinLED sub-array 121 includes LED 121 a. In this particular example,LED 121 a is deactivated in response to receiving output signal SOutput2. In this way, the physiological activity of β-carotene is driven in response to the light from one type of LED. - In one embodiment,
inputs violet light 170 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting the number ofLEDs 120 a. Further, the intensity ofblue light 162 provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted by deactivatingLEDs 121 a. - In another embodiment,
input 110 includespotentiometer 137 a, so that the intensity of blue-violet light 170 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjustingpotentiometer 137 a, as described in more detail above. Further,input 111 includespotentiometer 137 b, so that the intensity of light provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjustingpotentiometer 137 b so that output signal SOutput2 deactivatesLEDs 121 a. -
FIG. 4g is a graph ofwavelength spectrum 189 of light provided bylighting system 100 a. Action spectrum corresponding to pelargonin (Perlargonidin-3, 5-diglucoside) is also shown inFIG. 4g . InFIG. 4g ,wavelength spectrum 189 corresponds to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above withwavelength spectrum 180. - In the situation of
FIG. 4g ,input 110 provides signal SInput1 toLED driver circuit 140, andLED driver circuit 140 provides signal SOutput1 toLED sub-array 120, whereinLED sub-array 120 includes LED 120 a. In this particular example,LED 120 a is an LED that emits blue-green light 171 when activated. As shown inFIG. 4g , blue-green light 171 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 189 a between about 450 nm and 550 nm. In this way,LED 120 a provides blue-green light 171 which has a broader spectrum than the spectrum ofblue light 162FIG. 4e . As mentioned above, the wavelength distribution of light provided by an LED can be made broader and narrower in many different ways, such as by choosing the semiconductor material composition of the LED. - Further, in this situation,
input 111 provides input signal SInput2 toLED driver circuit 141, andLED driver circuit 141 provides output signal SOutput2 toLED sub-array 121, whereinLED sub-array 121 includes LED 121 a. In this particular example,LED 121 a is deactivated in response to receiving output signal SOutput2. In this way, the physiological activity of pelargonin is driven in response to the light from one type of LED. - In one embodiment,
inputs green light 171 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting the number ofLEDs 120 a. Further, the intensity of blue-green light 171 provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted by deactivatingLEDs 121 a. - In another embodiment,
input 110 includespotentiometer 137 a, so that the intensity of light provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjustingpotentiometer 137 a, as described in more detail above. Further,input 111 includespotentiometer 137 b, so that the intensity of light provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjustingpotentiometer 137 b so that output signal SOutput2 deactivatesLEDs 121 a. - It should be noted that the broadness of the wavelength spectra of blue-
green light 171 can be chosen by choosing the semiconductor material ofLEDs 120 a, as discussed above withFIG. 4f . Further, it should be noted that, in some embodiments,LEDs 121 a emitgreen light 163 and are activated so thatgreen light 163 is mixed with blue-green light 171. In this way,wavelength spectrum 189 corresponds to the wavelength spectra of two different types of LEDs, as discussed above withFIG. 4 e. -
FIG. 4h is a graph ofwavelength spectrum 190 of light provided bylighting system 100 a. Action spectrum corresponding to phycocyanin is also shown inFIG. 4h . InFIG. 4h ,wavelength spectrum 190 corresponds to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above withwavelength spectrum 180. - In the situation of
FIG. 4h ,input 110 provides signal SInput1 toLED driver circuit 140, andLED driver circuit 140 provides signal SOutput1 toLED sub-array 120, whereinLED sub-array 120 includes LED 120 a. In this particular example,LED 120 a is an LED that emits yellow-orange light 172 when activated. As shown inFIG. 4h , yellow-orange light 172 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 189 a between about 575 nm and 625 nm. - Further, in this situation,
input 111 provides input signal SInput2 toLED driver circuit 141, andLED driver circuit 141 provides output signal SOutput2 toLED sub-array 121, whereinLED sub-array 121 includes LED 121 a. In this particular example,LED 121 a is deactivated in response to receiving output signal SOutput2. In this way, the physiological activity of pelargonin is driven in response to the light from one type of LED. - In one embodiment,
inputs orange light 172 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting the number ofLEDs 120 a. Further, the intensity of yellow-orange light 172 provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted by deactivatingLEDs 121 a. - In another embodiment,
input 110 includespotentiometer 137 a, so that the intensity of yellow-orange light 172 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjustingpotentiometer 137 a, as described in more detail above. Further,input 111 includespotentiometer 137 b, so that the intensity of light provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjustingpotentiometer 137 b so that output signal SOutput2 deactivatesLEDs 121 a. It should be noted that the broadness of the wavelength spectra of yellow-orange light 172 can be chosen by choosing the semiconductor material ofLEDs 120 a, as discussed above withFIG. 4 f. -
FIG. 4i is a graph ofwavelength spectrum 191 of light provided bylighting system 100 a. Action spectrum corresponding to phycoerythrin is also shown inFIG. 4i . InFIG. 4i ,wavelength spectrum 191 corresponds to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above withwavelength spectrum 180. - In the situation of
FIG. 4i ,input 110 provides signal SInput1 toLED driver circuit 140, andLED driver circuit 140 provides signal SOutput1 toLED sub-array 120, whereinLED sub-array 120 includes LED 120 a. In this particular example,LED 120 a is an LED that emits blue-green light 171 when activated. As shown inFIG. 4i , blue-green light 171 has aGaussian wavelength spectrum 181 a between about 475 nm and 550 nm. - Further, in this situation,
input 111 provides input signal SInput2 toLED driver circuit 141, andLED driver circuit 141 provides output signal SOutput2 toLED sub-array 121, whereinLED sub-array 121 includes LED 121 a. In this particular example,LED 121 a emitsgreen light 163 when activated. As shown inFIG. 4i ,green light 163 has a Gaussian wavelength spectrum 191 b between about 500 nm and 575 nm. In this way, the physiological activity of phycoerythrin is driven in response to the light from two types of LEDs. - In one embodiment,
inputs green light 171 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjusting the number ofLEDs 120 a. Further, the intensity ofgreen light 163 provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjusting the number ofLEDs 121 a. - In another embodiment,
input 110 includespotentiometer 137 a, so that the intensity of blue-green light 171 provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted by adjustingpotentiometer 137 a, as described in more detail above. Further,input 111 includespotentiometer 137 b, so that the intensity ofgreen light 163 provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted by adjustingpotentiometer 137 b, as described in more detail above. It should be noted that the broadness of the wavelength spectra of blue-green light 171 and/orgreen light 163 can be chosen by choosing the semiconductor material ofLEDs - As mentioned above, the lighting system can include one or more LED sub-arrays, which include different types of LEDs. As will be discussed in more detail below, the type of LEDs of the sub-arrays can be chosen so that the lighting system can provide a desired wavelength spectrum between UV light and IR light, which is useful to drive the physiological activity of a plant. It should be noted that adjusting the intensity of red and blue light is believed to affect the physiological activity of the plant. One useful light spectrum ratio is to have about ninety-five percent (95%) red light and about five percent (5%) blue light. It is believed that the morphology of the plant changes in response to changing the ratio of red light and blue light. For example, the plant grows to be more compact in response to reducing the percentage of red light and increasing the percentage of blue light. One useful light spectrum ratio to grow a compact plant is to have about eighty percent (80%) red light and about twenty percent (20%) blue light. Adjusting the ratio of red light and blue light can produce an effect similar to that produced by plant growth regulators (PGR's) without the actual application of the PGR's. PGR's are hormones, and it is undesirable by some people to have hormones in plants because of certain perceived risks associated with human health.
-
FIGS. 5a and 5b are bottom and top perspective views, respectively, of alighting system 100 b. In this embodiment,lighting system 100 b includesinputs FIG. 5b ) operatively coupled toLED arrays LED arrays LED arrays FIGS. 5f and 5g . The LEDs ofarrays -
LED arrays FIG. 5b ) so thatlighting system 100 b provides a desired intensity of light away fromLED arrays LED arrays lighting system 100 b can be more effectively cooled, as will be discussed in more detail below. It should be noted that, in this embodiment,LED arrays LED arrays LED array 102 includes twenty five LEDs andLED array 103 includes twenty six LEDs. - In this embodiment,
lighting system 100 b includes alighting system housing 101 which houses LEDarrays housing sides FIGS. 5c and 5d are top and back perspective views oflighting system 100 b with and withoutlighting system housing 101, respectively.FIG. 5e is a front perspective view oflighting system 100 b withoutlighting system housing 101. In this embodiment,lighting system housing 101 includes opposedwalls Lighting system housing 101 includes anangled wall 101 g, which extends from an edge ofwall 101 a.Lighting system 101 includes anangled wall 101 b which extends from an edge ofangled wall 101 g.Lighting system 101 includes anangled wall 101 e which extends from an edge ofwall 101 f.Lighting system 101 includes anangled wall 101 d which extends from an edge ofangled wall 101 e.Lighting system 101 includes aback wall 101 c which extends from edges ofangled walls - As shown in
FIGS. 5c and 5d ,lighting system 100 b includes an on/offswitch 109 operatively coupled withLED controller 130. On/offswitch 109 is for turningLED controller 130 on and off. In this embodiment, on/offswitch 109 extends through angledwall 101 e, as shown inFIG. 5 b. - As shown in
FIGS. 5a, 5b, 5d and 5e ,lighting system 100 b includesfans fans LED arrays Fans lighting system 100 b. In this embodiment,fans LED arrays - As shown in
FIGS. 5d and 5e ,lighting system 100 includes aheatsinks LED arrays Heatsinks LED controller 130. As mentioned above,LED arrays LED arrays fans corresponding heatsinks -
FIG. 5f is a front view ofLED array 102 oflighting system 100 b, whereinLED array 102 includesLED sub-arrays LED array 102 generally includes one or more LED sub-arrays, but it includes five LED sub-arrays in this embodiment for illustrative purposes. An embodiment in whichLED array 102 includes two LED sub-arrays is discussed in more detail above. - In this embodiment,
LED sub-arrays LED array 102 includes twenty five LEDs. However, as discussed in more detail above withFIG. 1c ,LED array 102 includes two or more sub-arrays LEDs, and the LED sub-arrays generally include one or more LEDs. - In this embodiment,
LED sub-array 120 includesLEDs LED sub-array 121 includesLEDs LED sub-array 122 includesLEDs LED sub-array 123 includesLEDs LED sub-array 124 includesLEDs LED array 102 can emit many different colors of light in response to output signals received fromLED controller 130, as will be discussed in more detail below withFIGS. 9a -9 f. -
FIG. 5g is a front view ofLED array 103 oflighting system 100 b, whereinLED array 103 includesLED sub-arrays array support structure 106 b.LED array 103 generally includes one or more LED sub-arrays, but it includes five LED sub-arrays in this embodiment for illustrative purposes. An embodiment in whichLED array 103 includes two LED sub-arrays is discussed in more detail above. - In this embodiment,
LED sub-arrays LED array 103 includes twenty five LEDs. However, as discussed in more detail above withFIG. 1c ,LED array 103 includes two or more LEDs, and LED sub-arrays generally include one or more LEDs. - In this embodiment,
LED sub-array 125 includesLEDs LED sub-array 126 includesLEDs LED sub-array 127 includesLEDs LED sub-array 128 includesLEDs LED sub-array 129 includesLEDs LED array 103 can emit many different colors of light in response to output signals received fromLED controller 130, as will be discussed in more detail below withFIGS. 9a -9 f. - In this particular embodiment,
LED sub-arrays UV light 160. Hence,LEDs 120 a-120 e andLEDs 125 a-125 e are capable of emittingUV light 160. In some embodiments,UV light 160 has a wavelength between about 300 and 380 nm. In other embodiments, IR light 167 has a wavelength between about 350 and 380 nm. -
LED sub-arrays blue light 162. - Hence,
LEDs 121 a-121 e andLEDs 126 a-126 e are capable of emittingblue light 162.LED sub-arrays green light 163. Hence,LEDs 122 a-122 e andLEDs 127 a-127 e are capable of emittinggreen light 163.LED sub-arrays red light 166. Hence,LEDs 123 a-123 e andLEDs 128 a-128 e are capable of emittingred light 166.LED sub-arrays LEDs 124 a-124 e andLEDs 129 a-129 e are capable of emitting IR light 167. In some embodiments, IR light 167 has a wavelength between about 750 and 825 nm. In other embodiments, IR light 167 has a wavelength between about 750 and 900 nm. -
FIGS. 6a and 6b are block diagram oflighting system 100 b, which includes inputs 110-114 operatively coupled toLED arrays LED controller 130, whereinLED controller 130 includesLED sub-controllers FIG. 6a ,LED sub-controller 131 is operatively coupled toinputs LED array 102. In this embodiment,LED sub-controller 131 includesLED driver circuits LED sub-arrays inputs LED driver circuits - In operation,
input 110 provides input signal SInput1 toLED driver circuit 140 and, in response,LED driver circuit 140 provides output signal SOutput1 toLED sub-array 120. Further,input 111 provides input signal SInput2 toLED driver circuit 141 and, in response,LED driver circuit 141 provides output signal SOutput2 toLED sub-array 121.Input 112 provides an input signal SInput3 toLED driver circuit 141 and, in response,LED driver circuit 141 provides an output signal SOutput3 toLED sub-array 122.Input 113 provides an input signal SInput4 toLED driver circuit 141 and, in response,LED driver circuit 141 provides an output signal SOutput4 toLED sub-array 123.Input 114 provides an input signal SInput5 toLED driver circuit 141 and, in response,LED driver circuit 141 provides an output signal SOutput5 toLED sub-array 124. In this way, inputs 110-114 are operatively coupled toLED array 102 throughLED sub-controller 131. - In this embodiment, and as shown in
FIG. 6b ,LED sub-controller 132 is operatively coupled toinputs LED array 103. In this embodiment,LED sub-controller 132 includesLED driver circuits LED sub-arrays inputs LED driver circuits - In operation,
input 110 provides input signal SInput1 toLED driver circuit 145 and, in response,LED driver circuit 145 provides output signal SOutput1 toLED sub-array 125. Further,input 111 provides input signal SInput2 toLED driver circuit 146 and, in response,LED driver circuit 146 provides output signal SOutput2 toLED sub-array 126.Input 112 provides input signal SInput3 toLED driver circuit 147 and, in response,LED driver circuit 147 provides output signal SOutput3 toLED sub-array 127.Input 113 provides input signal SInput4 toLED driver circuit 148 and, in response,LED driver circuit 148 provides output signal SOutput4 toLED sub-array 128.Input 114 provides input signal SInput5 toLED driver circuit 149 and, in response,LED driver circuit 149 provides output signal SOutput5 toLED sub-array 129. In this way, inputs 110-114 are operatively coupled toLED array 103 throughLED sub-controller 132. - In some embodiments, inputs 110-114 each operate as a switch which is repeatably moveable between active and deactive conditions, as described in more detail above with
FIGS. 1a, 1b and 1c . However, in this embodiment, inputs 110-114 include potentiometers, as will be discussed in more detail below. -
FIG. 7a is a schematic diagram ofinput 110 operatively coupled toLED sub-array 120 throughLED driver circuit 140, whereininput 110 operates as a potentiometer. In this embodiment,input 110 includespotentiometer 137 a, which is connected betweenpower terminal 108 a andcurrent return 136. The output ofpotentiometer 137 a is connected toLED driver circuit 140, which includes LEDdriver circuit chip 150, so thatLED driver circuit 140 receives input signal SInput1. LEDdriver circuit chip 150 provides output signal SOutput1 to LED sub-array 120 (FIG. 6a ) in response to receiving input signal SInput1 frominput 110. In particular, LEDdriver circuit chip 150 provides output signal SOutput1 toLEDs 120 a-120 e.LEDs 120 a-120 e emitUV light 160 in response to being activated by output signal SOutput1. Further,LEDs 120 a-120 e do not emitUV light 160 in response to being deactivated by output signal SOutput1. - It should be noted that more information regarding LED driver circuits and LED driver circuit chips, as well as the connections of the components of
lighting system 100 a, is provided in more detail above with the discussion ofFIGS. 1a, 1b and 1c , as well as with the discussion ofFIGS. 2a and 2 b. -
FIG. 7b is a schematic diagram ofinput 111 operatively coupled toLED sub-array 121 throughLED driver circuit 141, whereininput 111 operates as a potentiometer. In this embodiment,input 111 includespotentiometer 137 b, which is connected betweenpower terminal 108 a andcurrent return 136. The output ofpotentiometer 137 b is connected toLED driver circuit 141, which includes LEDdriver circuit chip 151, so thatLED driver circuit 141 receives input signal SInput2. LEDdriver circuit chip 151 provides output signal SOutput2 to LED sub-array 121 (FIG. 6a ) in response to receiving input signal SInput2 frominput 111. In particular, LEDdriver circuit chip 151 provides output signal SOutput2 toLEDs 121 a-121 e.LEDs 121 a-121 e emitblue light 162 in response to being activated by output signal SOutput2. Further,LEDs 121 a-121 e do not emitblue light 162 in response to being deactivated by output signal SOutput2. -
FIG. 7c is a schematic diagram ofinput 112 operatively coupled toLED sub-array 122 throughLED driver circuit 142, whereininput 112 operates as a potentiometer. In this embodiment,input 112 includes apotentiometer 137 c, which is connected betweenpower terminal 108 a andcurrent return 136. The output ofpotentiometer 137 c is connected toLED driver circuit 142, which includes an LEDdriver circuit chip 152, so thatLED driver circuit 142 receives input signal SInput3. LEDdriver circuit chip 152 provides output signal SOutput3 to LED sub-array 122 (FIG. 6a ) in response to receiving input signal SInput3 frominput 112. In particular, LEDdriver circuit chip 152 provides output signal SOutput3 toLEDs 122 a-122 e.LEDs 122 a-122 e emitgreen light 163 in response to being activated by output signal SOutput3. Further,LEDs 122 a-122 e do not emitgreen light 163 in response to being deactivated by output signal SOutput3. -
FIG. 7d is a schematic diagram ofinput 113 operatively coupled toLED sub-array 123 throughLED driver circuit 143, whereininput 113 operates as a potentiometer. In this embodiment,input 113 includes apotentiometer 137 d, which is connected betweenpower terminal 108 a andcurrent return 136. The output ofpotentiometer 137 d is connected toLED driver circuit 143, which includes an LEDdriver circuit chip 153, so thatLED driver circuit 143 receives input signal SInput4. LEDdriver circuit chip 153 provides output signal SOutput4 to LED sub-array 123 (FIG. 6a ) in response to receiving input signal SInput4 frominput 113. In particular, LEDdriver circuit chip 153 provides output signal SOutput4 toLEDs 123 a-123 e.LEDs 123 a-123 e emitred light 166 in response to being activated by output signal SOutput4. Further,LEDs 123 a-123 e do not emitred light 166 in response to being deactivated by output signal SOutput4. -
FIG. 7e is a schematic diagram ofinput 114 operatively coupled toLED sub-array 124 throughLED driver circuit 144, whereininput 114 operates as a potentiometer. In this embodiment,input 114 includes apotentiometer 137 e, which is connected betweenpower terminal 108 a andcurrent return 136. The output ofpotentiometer 137 e is connected toLED driver circuit 144, which includes an LEDdriver circuit chip 154, so thatLED driver circuit 144 receives input signal SInput5. LEDdriver circuit chip 154 provides output signal SOutput5 to LED sub-array 124 (FIG. 6a ) in response to receiving input signal SInput5 frominput 114. In particular, LEDdriver circuit chip 154 provides output signal SOutput5 toLEDs 124 a-124 e.LEDs 124 a-124 e emit IR light 167 in response to being activated by output signal SOutput5. Further,LEDs 124 a-124 e do not emit IR light 167 in response to being deactivated by output signal SOutput5. -
FIG. 8a is a schematic diagram ofinput 110 operatively coupled toLED sub-array 125 throughLED driver circuit 145. As mentioned above,input 110 includespotentiometer 137 a, which is connected betweenpower terminal 108 a andcurrent return 136. In this embodiment, the output ofpotentiometer 137 a is connected toLED driver circuit 145, which includes an LEDdriver circuit chip 155, so thatLED driver circuit 145 receives input signal SInput1. LEDdriver circuit chip 155 provides output signal SOutput1 to LED sub-array 125 (FIG. 6b ) in response to receiving input signal SInput1 frominput 110. In particular, LEDdriver circuit chip 155 provides output signal SOutput1 toLEDs 125 a-125 e.LEDs 125 a-125 e emitUV light 160 in response to being activated by output signal SOutput1. Further,LEDs 125 a-125 e do not emitUV light 160 in response to being deactivated by output signal SOutput1. -
FIG. 8b is a schematic diagram ofinput 111 operatively coupled toLED sub-array 126 throughLED driver circuit 146. As mentioned above,input 111 includespotentiometer 137 b, which is connected betweenpower terminal 108 a andcurrent return 136. In this embodiment, the output ofpotentiometer 137 b is connected toLED driver circuit 146, which includes an LEDdriver circuit chip 156, so thatLED driver circuit 146 receives input signal SInput2. LEDdriver circuit chip 156 provides output signal SOutput2 to LED sub-array 126 (FIG. 6b ) in response to receiving input signal SInput2 frominput 111. In particular, LEDdriver circuit chip 156 provides output signal SOutput2 toLEDs 126 a-126 e.LEDs 126 a-126 e emitblue light 162 in response to being activated by output signal SOutput2. Further,LEDs 126 a-126 e do not emitblue light 162 in response to being deactivated by output signal SOutput2. -
FIG. 8c is a schematic diagram ofinput 112 operatively coupled toLED sub-array 127 throughLED driver circuit 147. As mentioned above,input 112 includespotentiometer 137 c, which is connected betweenpower terminal 108 a andcurrent return 136. In this embodiment, the output ofpotentiometer 137 c is connected toLED driver circuit 147, which includes an LEDdriver circuit chip 157, so thatLED driver circuit 147 receives input signal SInput3. LEDdriver circuit chip 157 provides output signal SOutput3 to LED sub-array 127 (FIG. 6b ) in response to receiving input signal SInput3 frominput 112. In particular, LEDdriver circuit chip 157 provides output signal SOutput3 toLEDs 127 a-127 e.LEDs 127 a-1272 e emitgreen light 163 in response to being activated by output signal SOutput3. Further,LEDs 127 a-127 e do not emitgreen light 163 in response to being deactivated by output signal SOutput3. -
FIG. 8d is a schematic diagram ofinput 113 operatively coupled toLED sub-array 128 throughLED driver circuit 148. As mentioned above,input 113 includespotentiometer 137 d, which is connected betweenpower terminal 108 a andcurrent return 136. In this embodiment, the output ofpotentiometer 137 d is connected toLED driver circuit 148, which includes an LEDdriver circuit chip 158, so thatLED driver circuit 148 receives input signal SInput4. LEDdriver circuit chip 158 provides output signal SOutput4 to LED sub-array 128 (FIG. 6b ) in response to receiving input signal SInput4 frominput 113. In particular, LEDdriver circuit chip 158 provides output signal SOutput4 toLEDs 127 a-127 e.LEDs 127 a-127 e emitred light 166 in response to being activated by output signal SOutput4. Further,LEDs 127 a-127 e do not emitred light 166 in response to being deactivated by output signal SOutput4. -
FIG. 8e is a schematic diagram ofinput 114 operatively coupled toLED sub-array 129 throughLED driver circuit 149. As mentioned above,input 114 includespotentiometer 137 e, which is connected betweenpower terminal 108 a andcurrent return 136. In this embodiment, the output ofpotentiometer 137 e is connected toLED driver circuit 149, which includes an LEDdriver circuit chip 159, so thatLED driver circuit 149 receives input signal SInput5. LEDdriver circuit chip 159 provides output signal SOutput5 to LED sub-array 129 (FIG. 6b ) in response to receiving input signal SInput5 frominput 114. In particular, LEDdriver circuit chip 159 provides output signal SOutput5 toLEDs 129 a-129 e.LEDs 129 a-129 e emit IR light 167 in response to being activated by output signal SOutput5. Further,LEDs 129 a-129 e do not emit IR light 167 in response to being deactivated by output signal SOutput5. - As mentioned above, the light emitting diodes included with
LED arrays LED controller 130, as will be discussed in more detail presently. -
FIG. 9a is a graph of awavelength spectrum 192 of light provided bylighting system 100 b, whereinwavelength spectrum 192 includes color mixing. InFIG. 9a ,wavelength spectrum 192 corresponds to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above withwavelength spectrum 180. - As mentioned above with
FIGS. 7a and 8a ,input 110 includespotentiometer 137 a. In some situations,potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 are decreased. The intensity ofUV light 160 decreases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 192 b, in response to decreasing the power of input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 withpotentiometer 137 a. - In some situations,
potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 are increased. The intensity ofUV light 160 increases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 192 c, in response to increasing the power of input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 withpotentiometer 137 a. - As mentioned above with
FIGS. 7b and 8b ,input 111 includespotentiometer 137 b. In some situations,potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 are decreased. The intensity ofblue light 162 decreases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 193 b, in response to decreasing the power of input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 withpotentiometer 137 b. - In some situations,
potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 are increased. The intensity ofblue light 162 increases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 193 c, in response to increasing the power of input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 withpotentiometer 137 b. - As mentioned above with
FIGS. 7c and 8c ,input 112 includespotentiometer 137 c. In some situations,potentiometer 137 c is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput3 and output signal SOutput3 are decreased. The intensity ofgreen light 163 decreases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 194 b, in response to decreasing the power of input signal SInput3 and output signal SOutput3 withpotentiometer 137 c. - In some situations,
potentiometer 137 c is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput3 and output signal SOutput3 are increased. The intensity ofgreen light 163 increases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 194 c, in response to increasing the power of input signal SInput3 and output signal SOutput3 withpotentiometer 137 c. - As mentioned above with
FIGS. 7d and 8d ,input 113 includespotentiometer 137 d. In some situations,potentiometer 137 d is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput4 and output signal SOutput4 are decreased. The intensity ofred light 166 decreases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 195 b, in response to decreasing the power of input signal SInput4 and output signal SOutput4 withpotentiometer 137 d. - In some situations,
potentiometer 137 d is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput4 and output signal SOutput4 are increased. The intensity ofred light 166 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 195 d, in response to increasing the power of input signal SInput4 and output signal SOutput4 withpotentiometer 137 d. - As mentioned above with
FIGS. 7e and 8e ,input 114 includespotentiometer 137 e. In some situations,potentiometer 137 e is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput5 and output signal SOutput5 are decreased. The intensity of IR light 167 decreases, as indicated bywavelength spectrum 196 b, in response to decreasing the power of input signal SInput5 and output signal SOutput5 withpotentiometer 137 e. - In some situations,
potentiometer 137 e is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput5 and output signal SOutput5 are increased. The intensity of IR light 167 increases, as indicated by wavelength spectrum 195 e, in response to increasing the power of input signal SInput5 and output signal SOutput5 withpotentiometer 137 e. In this way, the light emitting diodes included withLED arrays LED controller 130. -
FIG. 9b is a graph of awavelength spectrum 200 of light provided bylighting system 100 b, whereinwavelength spectrum 200 includes color mixing. InFIG. 9b ,wavelength spectrum 200 corresponds to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above withwavelength spectrum 180. - In this example,
potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 are adjusted, and the intensity ofUV light 160 is driven to zero. In this example,potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 are adjusted, and the intensity ofblue light 162 is driven to that indicated bywavelength spectrum 193 a. In this example,potentiometer 137 c is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput3 and output signal SOutput3 are adjusted, and the intensity ofgreen light 163 is driven to that indicated bywavelength spectrum 194 b. - In this example,
potentiometer 137 d is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput4 and output signal SOutput4 are adjusted, and the intensity ofred light 166 is driven to that indicated bywavelength spectrum 195 a. In this example,potentiometer 137 e is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput5 and output signal SOutput5 are adjusted, and the intensity of IR light 167 is driven to that indicated bywavelength spectrum 196 c. -
FIG. 9c is a graph of awavelength spectrum 201 of light provided bylighting system 100 b, whereinwavelength spectrum 201 includes color mixing. InFIG. 9c ,wavelength spectrum 201 corresponds to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm), as discussed above withwavelength spectrum 180. - In this example,
potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 are adjusted, and the intensity ofUV light 160 is driven to zero. In this example,potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 are adjusted, and the intensity ofblue light 162 is driven to that indicated bywavelength spectrum 193 a. In this example,potentiometer 137 c is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput3 and output signal SOutput3 are adjusted, and the intensity ofgreen light 163 is driven to that indicated bywavelength spectrum 194 c. - In this example,
potentiometer 137 d is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput4 and output signal SOutput4 are adjusted, and the intensity ofred light 166 is driven to that indicated bywavelength spectrum 195 b. In this example,potentiometer 137 e is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput5 and output signal SOutput5 are adjusted, and the intensity of IR light 167 is driven to that indicated bywavelength spectrum 196 b. - It should be noted that the desired mixture of light provided by
lighting system 100 b can be chosen to correspond to an action spectrum of a physiological activity of a plant, as will be discussed in more detail presently. -
FIG. 9d is a graph of awavelength spectrum 202 of light provided bylighting system 100 b, whereinwavelength spectrum 202 includes color mixing. Action spectrum corresponding to chlorophyll a is also shown inFIG. 9d . InFIG. 9d ,wavelength spectrum 202 and the action spectrum corresponding to chlorophyll a correspond to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm). - In this example,
potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 are adjusted, and the intensity ofUV light 160 is driven to zero. In this example,potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 are adjusted, and the intensity ofblue light 162 is driven to that indicated bywavelength spectrum 193 a. In this example,potentiometer 137 c is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput3 and output signal SOutput3 are adjusted, and the intensity ofgreen light 163 is driven to zero. - In this example,
potentiometer 137 d is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput4 and output signal SOutput4 are adjusted, and the intensity ofred light 166 is driven to that indicated bywavelength spectrum 195 a. In this example,potentiometer 137 e is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput5 and output signal SOutput5 are adjusted, and the intensity of IR light 167 is driven to zero. In this way, the desired mixture of light provided bylighting system 100 b is chosen to correspond to the action spectrum corresponding to chlorophyll a. -
FIG. 9e is a graph of awavelength spectrum 203 of light provided bylighting system 100 b, whereinwavelength spectrum 203 includes color mixing. Action spectrum corresponding to α-carotene is also shown inFIG. 9e . InFIG. 9e ,wavelength spectrum 203 and the action spectrum corresponding to α-carotene correspond to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm). - It should be noted that, in this example,
LED sub-arrays violet light 161 when activated, and do not emitviolet light 161 when deactivated. Hence,LEDs FIG. 7a emitviolet light 161 instead ofUV light 160. Further,LEDs FIG. 8a emitblue light 162 instead ofUV light 160. - In this example,
potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 are adjusted, and the intensity ofviolet light 161 is driven to that indicated bywavelength spectrum 196 a. In this example,potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 are adjusted, and the intensity ofblue light 162 is driven to that indicated bywavelength spectrum 193 a. In this example,potentiometer 137 c is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput3 and output signal SOutput3 are adjusted, and the intensity ofgreen light 163 is driven to zero. - In this example,
potentiometer 137 d is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput4 and output signal SOutput4 are adjusted, and the intensity ofred light 166 is driven to zero. In this example,potentiometer 137 e is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput5 and output signal SOutput5 are adjusted, and the intensity of IR light 167 is driven to zero. In this way, the desired mixture of light provided bylighting system 100 b is chosen to correspond to the action spectrum corresponding to α-carotene. -
FIG. 9f is a graph of awavelength spectrum 204 of light provided bylighting system 100 b, whereinwavelength spectrum 204 includes color mixing. Action spectrum corresponding to pelargonin is also shown inFIG. 9f . InFIG. 9f ,wavelength spectrum 204 and the action spectrum corresponding to pelargonin correspond to the intensity of light versus wavelength (nm). - It should be noted that, in this example,
LED sub-arrays green light 163 when activated, and do not emitgreen light 163 when deactivated. Hence,LEDs FIG. 7a emitviolet light 161 instead ofUV light 160. Further,LEDs FIG. 8a emitgreen light 163 instead ofUV light 160. - Further, in this example,
LED sub-arrays green light 171 when activated, and do not emit blue-green light 171 when deactivated. Hence,LEDs FIG. 7b emit blue-green light 171 instead ofblue light 162. Further,LEDs FIG. 8b emit blue-green light 171 instead ofblue light 162. - In this example,
potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 are adjusted, and the intensity ofviolet light 161 is driven to zero. In this example,potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 are adjusted, and the intensity of blue-green light 171 is driven to that indicated bywavelength spectrum 197 a. In this example,potentiometer 137 c is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput3 and output signal SOutput3 are adjusted, and the intensity ofgreen light 163 is driven to that indicated bywavelength spectrum 194 c. - In this example,
potentiometer 137 d is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput4 and output signal SOutput4 are adjusted, and the intensity ofred light 166 is driven to zero. In this example,potentiometer 137 e is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput5 and output signal SOutput5 are adjusted, and the intensity of IR light 167 is driven to zero. In this way, the desired mixture of light provided bylighting system 100 b is chosen to correspond to the action spectrum corresponding to pelargonin. - It should be noted that the desired mixture of light provided by
lighting system 100 b can be chosen to correspond to a wavelength spectrum of sunlight, as will be discussed in more detail presently. -
FIG. 9g is a graph of awavelength spectrum 205 of light provided bylighting system 100 b, whereinwavelength spectrum 205 includes color mixing. Awavelength spectrum 197 corresponding to sunlight is also shown inFIG. 9g . InFIG. 9g ,wavelength spectra - It should be noted that, in this example,
LED sub-arrays UV light 160 when activated, and do not emitUV light 160 when deactivated. Hence,LEDs FIG. 7a emitUV light 160. Further,LEDs FIG. 8a emitviolet light 161. - Further, in this example,
LED sub-arrays white light 168 when activated, and do not emitwhite light 168 when deactivated. Hence,LEDs FIG. 7b emitwhite light 168. Further,LEDs FIG. 8b emitwhite light 168. Awavelength spectrum 197 corresponding towhite light 168 is also shown inFIG. 9d . The LEDs ofLED sub-arrays white light 168 in many different ways. In this example, the LEDs ofLED sub-arrays white light 168 because they include phosphor coated LEDs, which emit blue light. In another example, the LEDs ofLED sub-arrays white light 168 because they include phosphor coated LEDs, which emit UV light. - In this example,
potentiometer 137 a is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput1 and output signal SOutput1 are adjusted, and the intensity ofUV light 160 is driven to zero. In this example,potentiometer 137 b is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput2 and output signal SOutput2 are adjusted, and the intensity ofwhite light 168 is driven to that indicated bywavelength spectrum 197. In this example,potentiometer 137 c is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput3 and output signal SOutput3 are adjusted, and the intensity ofgreen light 163 is driven to that indicated bywavelength spectrum 194 b. - In this example,
potentiometer 137 d is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput4 and output signal SOutput4 are adjusted, and the intensity ofred light 166 is driven to that indicated bywavelength spectrum 195 b. In this example,potentiometer 137 e is adjusted so the power of input signal SInput5 and output signal SOutput5 are adjusted, and the intensity of IR light 167 is driven to that indicated bywavelength spectrum 196 b. In this way, the desired mixture of light provided bylighting system 100 b is chosen to correspond to a wavelength spectrum of sunlight. -
FIG. 10 is a block diagram of alighting system 100 c, which includes aprogrammable logic controller 133 operatively coupled toLED array 102 throughLED controller 130.Lighting system 100 c includes atimer circuit 134 operatively coupled toprogrammable logic circuit 133.Timer circuit 134 can be of many different types, such as a 555 timer. 555 timers are made by many different manufacturers. For example, ECG Philips makes the ECG955M chip, Maxim makes the ICM7555 chip and Motorola makes the MC1455/MC1555 chip. -
Timer circuit 134 provides a timing signal STimer toprogrammable logic circuit 133 and, in response,programmable logic circuit 133 provides input signals SInput1, SInput2, SInput3, SInput4 and SInput5 toLED controller 130. As discussed in more detail above withFIGS. 6a and 6b , as well as withFIGS. 7a-7e andFIGS. 8a-8e ,LED controller 130 provides input signals SOutput1, SOutput2, SOutput3, SOutput4 and SOutput5 toLED array 102 in response to receiving input signals SInput1, SInput2, SInput3, SInput4 and SInput5. - In this embodiment,
programmable logic controller 133 is programmed to adjust input signals SInput1, SInput2, SInput3, SInput4 and SInput5 in response to receiving timing signal STimer.Programmable logic controller 133 can adjust input signals SInput1, SInput2, SInput3, SInput4 and SInput5 in response to receiving timing signal STimer in many different ways. - In one example,
programmable logic controller 133 adjusts input signals SInput1, SInput2, SInput3, SInput4 and SInput5 in response to receiving timing signal STimer so that the relative intensities oflight FIG. 9a are adjusted relative to each other, as described in more detail withFIGS. 9a-9g . In this way,lighting system 100 c includes a programmable logic circuit which adjusts input signals in response to receiving a timing signal from a timer. - In general,
lighting system 100 c allows the intensities oflight lighting system 100 c mimics the sun. -
FIGS. 11a and 11b are bottom and top perspective views, respectively, of alighting system 100 d. It should be noted thatlighting system 100 d is similar tolighting system 100 b ofFIGS. 5a-5e . In this embodiment,lighting system 100 d includesinputs FIG. 11b ) operatively coupled toLED arrays LED arrays LED arrays arrays -
LED arrays FIG. 11b ) so thatlighting system 100 d provides a desired intensity of light away fromLED arrays LED arrays lighting system 100 d can be more effectively cooled, as will be discussed in more detail below. It should be noted that, in this embodiment,LED arrays LED arrays LED array 102 includes twenty five LEDs andLED array 103 includes twenty six LEDs. - In this embodiment,
lighting system 100 d includeslighting system housing 101 which houses LEDarrays housing sides FIGS. 11c and 11d are top and back perspective views oflighting system 100 d with and withoutlighting system housing 101, respectively.FIG. 11e is a front perspective view oflighting system 100 d withoutlighting system housing 101. In this embodiment,lighting system housing 101 includes opposedwalls Lighting system housing 101 includesangled wall 101 g, which extends from the edge ofwall 101 a.Lighting system 101 includesangled wall 101 b which extends from the edge ofangled wall 101 g.Lighting system 101 includesangled wall 101 e which extends from the edge ofwall 101 f.Lighting system 101 includesangled wall 101 d which extends from the edge ofangled wall 101 e.Lighting system 101 includesback wall 101 c which extends from edges ofangled walls - As shown in
FIGS. 11c and 11d ,lighting system 100 b includes on/offswitch 109 operatively coupled withLED controller 130. On/offswitch 109 is for turningLED controller 130 on and off. In this embodiment, on/offswitch 109 extends through angledwall 101 e, as shown inFIG. 11 b. - In this embodiment,
lighting system 100 d includes an antenna, which allows the flow of a wireless signal, wherein the wireless signal can flow to and fromlighting system 100 d. The wireless signal can flow in many different ways, such as through a Wi-Fi network. The wireless signal can include many different types of information, as will be discussed in more detail below. In some embodiments, the wireless signal includes maintenance information regarding the operation oflighting system 100 d. In general,lighting system 100 d includes at least one antenna. In this embodiment,lighting system 100 d includesantennas Antenna 210 a extends throughwall 101 a andantenna 210 b extends through angledwall 101 b for illustrative purposes. It should be noted thatantennas lighting system housing 101, if desired. - In this embodiment,
antenna 210 c extends through ahousing side 116 a for illustrative purposes. It should be noted thatantenna 210 c can extend throughhousing side 116 b, if desired. In this way, the antennas oflighting system 100 d can be positioned to allow communication in a desired direction. As will be discussed in more detail below, the antennas oflighting system 100 d allow the communication to a remote device, such as a sensor, computer and the LED controller another lighting system. It should be noted that the antennas oflighting system 100 d are in communication with a communication module, such as a transceiver and modem, as will be discussed in more detail below. - In this embodiment,
lighting system 100 d includes a sensor, which senses a condition. The condition can be of many different types, such as a light condition. The sensor operates as a light sensor when the sensor senses a light condition. The sensor can operate as a photosynthesis meter, moisture meter, and gas analyzers to detect conditions proximate tolighting system 100 d, and apply feedback to adjust plant growth conditions. In some embodiments, the sensor is responsive to the physiological activity of the plant. It should be noted that, in some embodiments, the sensor is carried by a housing of the lighting system, as shown inFIGS. 11a-11e . Further, in other embodiments, the sensor is positioned remotely fromlighting system 100 d. The sensor can be in communication with the other components oflighting system 100 d in many different ways, such as through wired and wireless communication. - One type of photosynthesis meter is referred to as the FIELDSCOUT CM 1000 NDVI Meter manufactured by Spectrum Technologies, Inc. of Plainfield, Ill. One type of moisture meter is referred to as the Springfield 91746 Digital Moisture Meter manufactured by Springfield. of Plainfield, Ill. The moisture meter can be a wireless moisture meter, such as the one disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,975,236. The gas analyzer can be of many different types, such as an infrared gas analyzer. One type of infrared gas analyzers is referred to as the Anarad AR-500-R, which is responsive to carbon dioxide gas. More information regarding gas analyzers can be found in U.S. Pat. No. 6,624,887. It should be noted that the sensors of
lighting system 100 d can all be the same type of sensor, or different types of sensors. - In this embodiment,
lighting system 100 d includessensors lighting system 100 d includes one or more sensors. In this embodiment,lighting system 100 d includes six sensors for illustrative purposes. It should also be noted thatsensors - The sensors can be positioned at many different locations.
Sensor 211 a is coupled to wall 101 a andsensor 211 b is coupled toangled wall 101 b for illustrative purposes. Further,sensor 211 e is coupled towall 101 f andsensor 211 f is coupled toangled wall 101 d for illustrative purposes. It should be noted thatsensors lighting system housing 101, if desired. - In this embodiment,
sensor 211 c is coupled to front panel 115 and sensor 211 d is coupled tohousing side 116 b for illustrative purposes. It should be noted that sensor 211 d can be coupled tohousing side 116 a, if desired. In this way, the sensors oflighting system 100 d can be positioned to sense the condition from a desired direction. As will be discussed in more detail below, the sensors oflighting system 100 d are in communication with an LED controller oflighting system 100 d, such asLED controller 130. - As shown in
FIGS. 11a, 11b, 11d and 11e ,lighting system 100 d includesfans fans LED arrays Fans lighting system 100 d. In this embodiment,fans LED arrays - As shown in
FIGS. 11d and 11e ,lighting system 100 includesheatsinks LED arrays Heatsinks LED controller 130. As mentioned above,LED arrays LED arrays fans corresponding heatsinks - In this embodiment,
LED sub-arrays LED array 102 includes twenty five LEDs. However, as discussed in more detail above withFIG. 1c ,LED array 102 includes two or more sub-arrays LEDs, and the LED sub-arrays generally include one or more LEDs. - In this embodiment,
LED sub-array 120 includesLEDs LED sub-array 121 includesLEDs LED sub-array 122 includesLEDs LED sub-array 123 includesLEDs LED sub-array 124 includesLEDs LED array 102 can emit many different colors of light in response to output signals received fromLED controller 130, as will be discussed in more detail below withFIGS. 9a -9 f. - In this embodiment, wherein
LED array 103 includesLED sub-arrays array support structure 106 b.LED array 103 generally includes one or more LED sub-arrays, but it includes five LED sub-arrays in this embodiment for illustrative purposes. An embodiment in whichLED array 103 includes two LED sub-arrays is discussed in more detail above. - In this embodiment,
LED sub-arrays LED array 103 includes twenty five LEDs. However, as discussed in more detail above withFIG. 1c ,LED array 103 includes two or more LEDs, and LED sub-arrays generally include one or more LEDs. - In this embodiment,
LED sub-array 125 includesLEDs LED sub-array 126 includesLEDs LED sub-array 127 includesLEDs LED sub-array 128 includesLEDs LED sub-array 129 includesLEDs LED array 103 can emit many different colors of light in response to output signals received fromLED controller 130, as discussed in more detail above. - In this particular embodiment,
LED sub-arrays UV light 160. Hence,LEDs 120 a-120 e andLEDs 125 a-125 e are capable of emittingUV light 160. In some embodiments,UV light 160 has a wavelength between about 300 and 380 nm. In other embodiments, IR light 167 has a wavelength between about 350 and 380 nm. -
LED sub-arrays blue light 162. Hence,LEDs 121 a-121 e andLEDs 126 a-126 e are capable of emittingblue light 162.LED sub-arrays green light 163. Hence,LEDs 122 a-122 e andLEDs 127 a-127 e are capable of emittinggreen light 163.LED sub-arrays red light 166. Hence,LEDs 123 a-123 e andLEDs 128 a-128 e are capable of emittingred light 166.LED sub-arrays LEDs 124 a-124 e andLEDs 129 a-129 e are capable of emitting IR light 167. In some embodiments, IR light 167 has a wavelength between about 750 and 825 nm. In other embodiments, IR light 167 has a wavelength between about 750 and 900 nm. -
FIG. 12a is a block diagram of one embodiment of alighting system 100 e. It should be noted thatlighting system 100 e can be included withlighting system 100 d ofFIGS. 11a-11e . In this embodiment,lighting system 100 e includesLED controller 130, which includesLED sub-controller 131.LED sub-controller 131 is in communication withLED array 102, as discussed in more detail above. As mentioned in more detail above, the operation ofLED array 102 is adjustable in response to adjusting output signal SOutput. LED controller 130 andLED sub-controller 131 are powered bypower supply 108, as discussed in more detail above. It should be noted that the embodiments discussed below refer toLED array 102 andLED sub-controller 131 ofLED controller 130. However, it should be noted that the discussion also applies toLED array 103 andLED sub-controller 132, which are discussed in more detail above. - In this embodiment,
lighting system 100 e includessensors LED controller 130. In particular,sensors LED sub-controller 131.Sensors - In this embodiment,
lighting system 100 e includesantenna 210 c in communication withLED controller 130 through acommunication module 212 c. In particular,antenna 210 c is in communication withLED sub-controller 131 throughcommunication module 212 c.Communication module 212 c can be of many different types, such as a wireless transceiver and wireless modem. A modem and transceiver send and receive signals, but a modem modulates and demodulates the signal. Wireless signal SWireless1 can be provided in many different ways, such as by a remote device. The remote device can be of many different types, such as a computer and another lighting system. - In a first mode of operation,
antenna 210 c receives wireless signal SWireless1 and, in response,communication module 212 c provides a control signal SControl toLED controller 130. The operation ofLED controller 130 is adjusted in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl. The operation ofLED controller 130 can be adjusted in many different ways. For example, in some situations,LED sub-controller 131 is turned on and off, such as by turning on and offpower supply 108, in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl. In another embodiment,LED sub-controller 131 adjusts the wavelength of light provided byLED array 102 in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED controller 130 is adjusted, in response to receiving control signal SControl, to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED array 102. It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED array 102 to adjust the amount of power used bylighting system 100 e. In another embodiment, the operation of a sensor, such assensors 211 a and/or 211 b is adjusted in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl. The operation of the sensor can be adjusted in many different ways, such as by turning the sensor on and off. - In a second mode of operation, the sensor of
lighting system 100 e senses a condition, such as a light condition or the physiological activity of the plant, and, in response, provides a sense signal toLED controller 130. For example, in one embodiment,sensor 211 a is a light sensor which senses a wavelength of light and, in response, provides a sense signal SSense1 toLED controller 130. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED controller 130 is adjusted in response to receiving sense signal SSense1. For example, the operation ofLED controller 130 is adjusted to adjust the wavelength of light provided byLED array 102. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED controller 130 is adjusted to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED array 102. It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED array 102 to adjust the amount of power used bylighting system 100 e. In some embodiments, sense signal SSense1 is flowed throughcommunication module 212 c andantenna 210 c as wireless signal SWireless1, wherein wireless signal SWireless1 includes information corresponding to the wavelength of light sensed bysensor 211 a. - In another embodiment,
sensor 211 b is a gas sensor which senses a type of gas proximate tolighting system 100 e and, in response, provides a sense signal SSense2 toLED controller 130. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED controller 130 is adjusted in response to receiving sense signal SSense2 For example, the operation ofLED controller 130 is adjusted to adjust the wavelength of light provided byLED array 102. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED controller 130 is adjusted to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED array 102. It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED array 102 to adjust the amount of power used bylighting system 100 e. In some embodiments, sense signal SSense2 is flowed throughcommunication module 212 c andantenna 210 c as wireless signal SWireless1, wherein wireless signal SWireless1 includes information corresponding to the type of gas sensed bysensor 211 b. - In another embodiment,
sensor 211 b is a photosynthesis meter which senses the plant stress level of a plant proximate tolighting system 100 e and, in response, provides sense signal SSense2 toLED controller 130. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED controller 130 is adjusted in response to receiving sense signal SSense2 For example, the operation ofLED controller 130 is adjusted to adjust the wavelength of light provided byLED array 102. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED controller 130 is adjusted to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED array 102. It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED array 102 to adjust the amount of power used bylighting system 100 e. In some embodiments, sense signal SSense2 is flowed throughcommunication module 212 c andantenna 210 c as wireless signal SWireless1, wherein wireless signal SWireless1 includes information corresponding to the plant stress level sensed bysensor 211 b. - In another embodiment,
sensor 211 a is a gas analyzer which senses the type and/or amount of gas proximate tolighting system 100 e and, in response, provides sense signal SSense1 toLED controller 130. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED controller 130 is adjusted in response to receiving sense signal SSense1. For example, the operation ofLED controller 130 is adjusted to adjust the wavelength of light provided byLED array 102. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED controller 130 is adjusted to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED array 102. It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED array 102 to adjust the amount of power used bylighting system 100 e. In some embodiments, sense signal SSense1 is flowed throughcommunication module 212 c andantenna 210 c as wireless signal SWireless1, wherein wireless signal SWireless1 includes information corresponding to the type and/or amount of gas sensed bysensor 211 a. - In a third mode of operation, wireless signal SWireless1 includes information corresponding to a growth season.
Antenna 210 c receives wireless signal SWireless1 and, in response,communication module 212 c provides control signal SControl toLED controller 130. The operation ofLED controller 130 is adjusted in response to receiving control signal SControl. The operation ofLED controller 130 can be adjusted in many different ways. For example, in some situations,LED sub-controller 131 adjusts the wavelength of light provided byLED array 102 in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl. In this way, the wavelength of light provided byLED array 102 is adjusted in response to an indication of the growth season. In another embodiment,LED sub-controller 131 adjusts the intensity of light provide byLED array 102 in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl. It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED array 102 to adjust the amount of power used bylighting system 100 e. In this way, the amount of power used bylighting system 100 e is adjustable in response to the indication of the growth season. In another embodiment, the operation of the sensor, such assensors 211 a and/or 211 b, is adjusted in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl. In this way, the operation ofsensors 211 a and/or 211 b is adjusted in response to the indication of the growth season. - In a fourth mode of operation, wireless signal SWireless1 includes information corresponding to a type of plant positioned proximate to
lighting system 100 e.Antenna 210 c receives wireless signal SWireless1 and, in response,communication module 212 c provides control signal SControl toLED controller 130. The operation ofLED controller 130 is adjusted in response to receiving control signal SControl. The operation ofLED controller 130 can be adjusted in many different ways. For example, in some situations,LED sub-controller 131 adjusts the wavelength of light provided byLED array 102 in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl. In this way, the wavelength of light provided byLED array 102 is adjusted in response to an indication of the type of plant positioned proximate tolighting system 100 e. In another embodiment, the operation of the sensor, such assensors 211 a and/or 211 b, is adjusted in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl. In this way, the operation ofsensors 211 a and/or 211 b is adjusted in response to the indication of the type of plant positioned proximate tolighting system 100 e. -
FIG. 12b is a block diagram of one embodiment of alighting system 100 f. It should be noted thatlighting system 100 f can be included withlighting system 100 d ofFIGS. 11a-11e . It should be noted thatlighting system 100 f includes a portion of the embodiment oflighting system 100 a ofFIG. 1b . In this embodiment,lighting system 100 f includesLED controller 130, which includesLED sub-controller 131. In this embodiment,LED sub-controller 131 includesLED driver circuits LED driver circuits LED sub-controller 131 are powered bypower supply 108, as discussed in more detail above. - In this embodiment,
lighting system 100 f includesLED array 102, whereinLED sub-controller 131 is in communication withLED array 102, as discussed in more detail above. In particular,LED driver circuit 140 is in communication withLED sub-array 120 andLED driver circuit 141 is in communication withLED sub-array 121. As discussed in more detail above, the operation ofLED sub-arrays - It should be noted that LED sub-arrays 120 and 121 are capable of providing a desire wavelength spectrum, such as those shown in
FIGS. 3a, 3b, 3c, 4a, 4b, 4c, 4d, 4e, 4f, 4g, 4h and 4 i. For example, in one embodiment,LED sub-array 120 provides the wavelength spectrum ofFIG. 3a andLED sub-array 121 provides the wavelength spectrum ofFIG. 3b . In another embodiment,LED sub-array 120 provides the wavelength spectrum ofFIG. 3c andLED sub-array 121 provides the wavelength spectrum ofFIG. 4 a. - It should be noted that the wavelength spectrums provided by LED sub-arrays 120 and 121 are adjustable with time. For example, during a first time period,
LED sub-array 120 provides the wavelength spectrum ofFIG. 3a and, during a second time period,LED sub-array 120 provides the wavelength spectrum ofFIG. 4a . Further, during the first time period,LED sub-array 121 provides the wavelength spectrum ofFIG. 3b and, during the second time period,LED sub-array 121 provides the wavelength spectrum ofFIG. 4 g. - In this embodiment,
lighting system 100 f includessensors LED sub-controller 131. In particular,sensors LED driver circuits Sensors - In this embodiment,
lighting system 100 f includesantenna 210 a in communication withLED sub-controller 131 through acommunication module 212 a. In particular,antenna 210 a is in communication withLED driver circuit 140 throughcommunication module 212 a.Communication module 212 a can be of many different types, such as a wireless transceiver. - In this embodiment,
lighting system 100 f includesantenna 210 b in communication withLED sub-controller 131 through acommunication module 212 b. In particular,antenna 210 b is in communication withLED driver circuit 141 throughcommunication module 212 b.Communication modules - The operation of
lighting system 100 f is similar to the operation oflighting system 100 e ofFIG. 12a . In a first mode of operation,antenna 210 a receives wireless signal SWireless1 and, in response,communication module 212 a provides control signal SControl1 toLED controller 130. The operation ofLED driver circuit 140 is adjusted in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl1. The operation ofLED driver circuit 140 can be adjusted in many different ways. For example, in some situations,LED driver circuit 140 is turned on and off, such as by turning on and offpower supply 108, in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl1. In another embodiment,LED driver circuit 140 adjusts the wavelength of light provided byLED sub-array 120 in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl1. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED driver circuit 140 is adjusted, in response to receiving control signal SControl1, to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED sub-array 120. It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED sub-array 120 to adjust the amount of power used bylighting system 100 f. In another embodiment, the operation of a sensor, such assensors 211 a and/or 211 b is adjusted in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl1. The operation of the sensor can be adjusted in many different ways, such as by turning the sensor on and off. - In the first mode of operation,
antenna 210 b receives wireless signal SWireless2 and, in response,communication module 212 a provides control signal SControl2 toLED controller 130. The operation ofLED driver circuit 141 is adjusted in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl2. The operation ofLED driver circuit 141 can be adjusted in many different ways. For example, in some situations,LED driver circuit 141 is turned on and off, such as by turning on and offpower supply 108, in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl2. In another embodiment,LED driver circuit 141 adjusts the wavelength of light provided byLED sub-array 121 in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl2. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED driver circuit 141 is adjusted, in response to receiving control signal SControl2, to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED sub-array 121. It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED sub-array 121 to adjust the amount of power used bylighting system 100 f. In another embodiment, the operation of a sensor, such assensors 211 a and/or 211 b is adjusted in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl2. The operation of the sensor can be adjusted in many different ways, such as by turning the sensor on and off. - In a second mode of operation, the sensor of
lighting system 100 f senses a condition, such as a light condition or the physiological activity of the plant, and, in response, provides a sense signal toLED controller 130. For example, in one embodiment,sensor 211 a is a light sensor which senses a wavelength of light and, in response, provides sense signal SSense1 toLED controller 130. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED sub-array 120 is adjusted byLED driver circuit 140 in response toLED controller 130 receiving sense signal SSense1. For example, the operation ofLED sub-array 120 is adjusted to adjust the wavelength of light provided byLED sub-array 120. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED sub-array 120 is adjusted to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED sub-array 120. It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED sub-array 120 to adjust the amount of power used bylighting system 100 f. In some embodiments, sense signal SSense1 is flowed throughcommunication module 212 a andantenna 210 a as wireless signal SWireless1, wherein wireless signal SWireless1 includes information corresponding to the wavelength of light sensed bysensor 211 a. - In the second mode of operation,
sensor 211 b is a gas sensor which senses a type of gas proximate tolighting system 100 f and, in response, provides sense signal SSense2 toLED controller 130. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED driver circuit 141 is adjusted in response toLED controller 130 receiving sense signal SSense2 For example, the operation ofLED driver circuit 141 is adjusted to adjust the wavelength of light provided byLED sub-array 121. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED driver circuit 141 is adjusted to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED sub-array 121. It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED sub-array 121 to adjust the amount of power used bylighting system 100 f. In some embodiments, sense signal SSense2 is flowed throughcommunication module 212 b andantenna 210 c as wireless signal SWireless2, wherein wireless signal SWireless2 includes information corresponding to the type of gas sensed bysensor 211 b. - In another embodiment,
sensor 211 b is a photosynthesis meter which senses the plant stress level of a plant proximate tolighting system 100 f and, in response, provides sense signal SSense2 toLED controller 130. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED driver circuit 141 is adjusted in response toLED controller 130 receiving sense signal SSense2 For example, the operation ofLED driver circuit 141 is adjusted to adjust the wavelength of light provided byLED sub-array 121. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED driver circuit 141 is adjusted to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED sub-array 121. It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED sub-array 121 to adjust the amount of power used bylighting system 100 f. In some embodiments, sense signal SSense2 is flowed throughcommunication module 212 b andantenna 210 b as wireless signal SWireless2, wherein wireless signal SWireless2 includes information corresponding to the plant stress level sensed bysensor 211 b. - In another embodiment,
sensor 211 b is a gas analyzer which senses the type and/or amount of gas proximate tolighting system 100 f and, in response, provides sense signal SSense2 toLED controller 130. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED driver circuit 141 is adjusted in response toLED controller 130 receiving sense signal SSense2 For example, the operation ofLED driver circuit 141 is adjusted to adjust the wavelength of light provided byLED sub-array 121. In some embodiments, the operation ofLED driver circuit 141 is adjusted to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED sub-array 121. It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED sub-array 121 to adjust the amount of power used bylighting system 100 f. In some embodiments, sense signal SSense2 is flowed throughcommunication module 212 b andantenna 210 b as wireless signal SWireless2, wherein wireless signal SWireless2 includes information corresponding to the type and/or amount of gas sensed bysensor 211 b. - In a third mode of operation, wireless signal SWireless1 includes information corresponding to the growth season.
Antenna 210 a receives wireless signal SWireless1 and, in response,communication module 212 a provides control signal SControl1 toLED controller 130. The operation ofLED driver circuit 140 is adjusted in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl1. The operation ofLED driver circuit 140 can be adjusted in many different ways. For example, in some situations,LED driver circuit 140 adjusts the wavelength of light provided byLED sub-array 120 in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl1. In this way, the wavelength of light provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted in response to an indication of the growth season. In another embodiment,LED driver circuit 140 adjusts the intensity of light provide byLED sub-array 120 in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl1. It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED sub-array 120 to adjust the amount of power used bylighting system 100 f. In this way, the amount of power used bylighting system 100 f is adjustable in response to the indication of the growth season. In another embodiment, the operation of the sensor, such assensors 211 a and/or 211 b, is adjusted in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl1. In this way, the operation ofsensors 211 a and/or 211 b is adjusted in response to the indication of the growth season. - In the third mode of operation, wireless signal SWireless2 includes information corresponding to the growth season.
Antenna 210 b receives wireless signal SWireless2 and, in response,communication module 212 b provides control signal SControl2 toLED controller 130. The operation ofLED driver circuit 141 is adjusted in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl2. The operation ofLED driver circuit 141 can be adjusted in many different ways. For example, in some situations,LED driver circuit 141 adjusts the wavelength of light provided byLED sub-array 121 in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl2. In this way, the wavelength of light provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted in response to an indication of the growth season. In another embodiment,LED driver circuit 141 adjusts the intensity of light provide byLED sub-array 121 in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl2. It is useful to adjust the intensity of light provided byLED sub-array 121 to adjust the amount of power used bylighting system 100 f. In this way, the amount of power used bylighting system 100 f is adjustable in response to the indication of the growth season. In another embodiment, the operation of the sensor, such assensors 211 a and/or 211 b, is adjusted in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl2. In this way, the operation ofsensors 211 a and/or 211 b is adjusted in response to the indication of the growth season. - In a fourth mode of operation, wireless signal SWireless1 includes information corresponding to a type of plant positioned proximate to
lighting system 100 f.Antenna 210 a receives wireless signal SWireless1 and, in response,communication module 212 a provides control signal SControl1 toLED controller 130. The operation ofLED driver circuit 140 is adjusted in response to receiving control signal SControl1. The operation ofLED driver circuit 140 can be adjusted in many different ways. For example, in some situations,LED driver circuit 140 adjusts the wavelength of light provided byLED sub-array 120 in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl1. In this way, the wavelength of light provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted in response to an indication of the type of plant positioned proximate tolighting system 100 f. In another embodiment, the operation of the sensor, such assensors 211 a and/or 211 b, is adjusted in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl1. In this way, the operation ofsensors 211 a and/or 211 b is adjusted in response to the indication of the type of plant positioned proximate tolighting system 100 f. - In the fourth mode of operation, wireless signal SWireless2 includes information corresponding to a type of plant positioned proximate to
lighting system 100 f.Antenna 210 b receives wireless signal SWireless2 and, in response,communication module 212 b provides control signal SControl2 toLED controller 130. The operation ofLED driver circuit 141 is adjusted in response to receiving control signal SControl2. The operation ofLED driver circuit 141 can be adjusted in many different ways. For example, in some situations,LED driver circuit 141 adjusts the wavelength of light provided byLED sub-array 121 in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl2. In this way, the wavelength of light provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted in response to an indication of the type of plant positioned proximate tolighting system 100 f. In another embodiment, the operation of the sensor, such assensors 211 a and/or 211 b, is adjusted in response toLED controller 130 receiving control signal SControl2. In this way, the operation ofsensors 211 a and/or 211 b is adjusted in response to the indication of the type of plant positioned proximate tolighting system 100 f. - In a fifth mode of operation, wireless signals SWireless1 and SWireless2 include information regarding first and second wavelength spectrums. As mentioned above,
LED sub-arrays FIGS. 3a, 3b, 3c, 4a, 4b, 4c, 4d, 4e, 4f, 4g, 4h and 4 i. -
Antenna 210 a receives wireless signal SWireless1 and, in response,communication module 212 a provides control signal SControl1 toLED controller 130. The operation ofLED driver circuit 140 is adjusted in response to receiving control signal SControl1. In this embodiment,LED driver circuit 140 adjusts the wavelength of light provided byLED sub-array 120 to match the first wavelength spectrum. In this way, the wavelength of light provided byLED sub-array 120 is adjusted in response to wireless signal SWireless1. -
Antenna 210 b receives wireless signal SWireless2 and, in response,communication module 212 b provides control signal SControl2 toLED controller 130. The operation ofLED driver circuit 141 is adjusted in response to receiving control signal SControl2. In this embodiment,LED driver circuit 141 adjusts the wavelength of light provided byLED sub-array 121 to match the first wavelength spectrum. In this way, the wavelength of light provided byLED sub-array 121 is adjusted in response to wireless signal SWireless2. - The wavelength spectrums of wireless signals SWireless1 and SWireless2 can be adjusted with time. For example, during the first time period,
LED sub-array 120 provides the first wavelength spectrum andLED sub-array 121 provides the second wavelength spectrum. During the second period of time, wireless signals SWireless1 and SWireless2 include information regarding third and fourth wavelength spectrums. Hence, during the second time period,LED sub-array 120 provides the third wavelength spectrum andLED sub-array 121 provides the fourth wavelength spectrum. It should be noted that the wavelength spectrums can be adjusted over more time periods, if desired. -
FIG. 13a is a schematic diagram of one embodiment of a portion oflighting system 100 f ofFIG. 12b . It should be noted that some of the components ofFIG. 13a are also shown inFIG. 2a , and are described in more detail withFIG. 2a . In this embodiment,sensor 211 a is embodied as aphotodiode 214 a, wherein one terminal ofphotodiode 214 a is connected tocurrent return 136 and another terminal ofphotodiode 214 a is connected toterminal 10 ofLED driver chip 150, whereinLED driver chip 150 is included withLED driver circuit 140. In this embodiment,LED driver chip 150 is embodied as the LT3477EFE chip manufactured by Linear Technology, Inc. of Milpitas, Calif.Photodiode 214 a provides sense signal SSense1 to terminal 10 in response to receiving incident light 169 a. Sense signal SSense1 is adjustable in response to adjusting a parameter of incident light 169 a. The parameter of incident light 169 a can be of many different types of parameters, such as the intensity and/or wavelength of the light. - As mentioned above, the LT3477EFE chip is connected to electrical components, such as a resistor, inductor, capacitor and a Schottky diode, so that it operates as an LED driver. More information regarding the LT3477EFE chip, and how it is connected to the electrical components to operate as an LED driver, can be found in a corresponding Data Sheet provided by Linear Technology, Inc.
- In this embodiment,
communication module 212 a (FIG. 12b ) is connected toterminal 7 ofLED driver chip 150 through a circuit that includes a diode, transistor, capacitor and resistor, as shown inFIG. 13a . More information regarding the LT3477EFE chip, and howcommunication module 212 a is connected to the LT3477EFE chip can be found in a corresponding Data Sheet provided by Linear Technology, Inc. In this embodiment, the operation ofLED 120 a is adjustable in response to adjusting control signal SControl1. - In operation,
photodiode 214 a provides sense signal SSense1 to terminal 10 in response to receiving incident light 169 a. The power of sense signal SSense1 is adjustable in response to adjusting a parameter of incident light 169 a, such as its intensity and/or wavelength. For example, in one situation, LEDdriver circuit chip 150 adjusts the power of output signal SOutput1 in response to the power of sense signal SSense1 being adjusted, wherein the power of sense signal SSense1 is adjusted in response to adjusting the intensity and/or wavelength of incident light 169 a. In this particular example, the intensity ofblue light 162 emitted byLED 120 a increases in response to the amount of power of sense signal SSense1 being increased by LEDdriver circuit chip 150. Further, the intensity ofblue light 162 emitted byLED 120 a decreases in response to the amount of power of sense signal SSense1 being decreased. -
FIG. 13b is a schematic diagram of one embodiment of another portion oflighting system 100 f ofFIG. 12b . It should be noted that some of the components ofFIG. 13b are also shown inFIG. 2b , and are described in more detail withFIG. 2b . In this embodiment,sensor 211 b is embodied as aphotodiode 214 b, wherein one terminal ofphotodiode 214 b is connected tocurrent return 136 and another terminal ofphotodiode 214 b is connected toterminal 10 ofLED driver chip 151, whereinLED driver chip 151 is included withLED driver circuit 141. In this embodiment,LED driver chip 151 is embodied as the LT3477EFE chip manufactured by Linear Technology, Inc. of Milpitas, Calif.Photodiode 214 b provides sense signal SSense2 to terminal 10 in response to receiving incident light 169 b. Sense signal SSense2 is adjustable in response to adjusting a parameter of incident light 169 b. The parameter of incident light 169 b can be of many different types of parameters, such as the intensity and/or wavelength of the light. - As mentioned above, the LT3477EFE chip is connected to electrical components, such as a resistor, inductor, capacitor and a Schottky diode, so that it operates as an LED driver. More information regarding the LT3477EFE chip, and how it is connected to the electrical components to operate as an LED driver, can be found in a corresponding Data Sheet provided by Linear Technology, Inc.
- In this embodiment,
communication module 212 b (FIG. 12b ) is connected toterminal 7 ofLED driver chip 151 through a circuit that includes a diode, transistor, capacitor and resistor, as shown inFIG. 13b . More information regarding the LT3477EFE chip, and howcommunication module 212 b is connected to the LT3477EFE chip can be found in a corresponding Data Sheet provided by Linear Technology, Inc. In this embodiment, the operation ofLED 121 a is adjustable in response to adjusting control signal SControl2. - In operation,
photodiode 214 b provides sense signal SSense2 to terminal 10 in response to receiving incident light 169 b. The power of sense signal SSense2 is adjustable in response to adjusting a parameter of incident light 169 b, such as its intensity and/or wavelength. For example, in one situation, LEDdriver circuit chip 151 adjusts the power of output signal SOutput2 in response to the power of sense signal SSense2 being adjusted, wherein the power of sense signal SSense2 is adjusted in response to adjusting the intensity and/or wavelength of incident light 169 b. In this particular example, the intensity ofred light 166 emitted byLED 121 a increases in response to the amount of power of sense signal SSense2 being increased by LEDdriver circuit chip 151. Further, the intensity ofred light 166 emitted byLED 121 a decreases in response to the amount of power of sense signal SSense2 being decreased. -
FIG. 14a is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a portion oflighting system 100 f ofFIG. 12b . It should be noted that some of the components ofFIG. 14a are also shown inFIG. 2a , and are described in more detail withFIG. 2a . In this embodiment,sensor 211 a is embodied asphotodiode 214 a, wherein one terminal ofphotodiode 214 a is connected tocurrent return 136 and another terminal ofphotodiode 214 a is connected toterminal 10 ofLED driver chip 150, whereinLED driver chip 150 is included withLED driver circuit 140. In this embodiment,LED driver chip 150 is embodied as the LT3477EFE chip manufactured by Linear Technology, Inc. of Milpitas, Calif.Photodiode 214 a provides sense signal SSense1 to terminal 10 in response to receiving incident light 169 a. Sense signal SSense1 is adjustable in response to adjusting a parameter of incident light 169 a. The parameter of incident light 169 a can be of many different types of parameters, such as the intensity and/or wavelength of the light. - As mentioned above, the LT3477EFE chip is connected to electrical components, such as a resistor, inductor, capacitor and a Schottky diode, so that it operates as an LED driver. More information regarding the LT3477EFE chip, and how it is connected to the electrical components to operate as an LED driver, can be found in a corresponding Data Sheet provided by Linear Technology, Inc.
- In this embodiment, a
memory 213 a is connected toterminal 7 ofLED driver chip 150.Memory 213 a provides a memory signal SMem1 toterminal 7 ofLED driver chip 150. In this embodiment,memory 213 a is a digital memory capable of storing digital information. The operation ofLED 120 a is adjustable in response to adjusting memory signal SMem1. In some embodiments,communication module 212 a andantenna 212 a (FIG. 12b ) are in communication withmemory 213 a. In these embodiments,digital information memory 213 a flows betweenmemory 213 a andcommunication module 212 a in control signal SControl1. As mentioned above, control signal SControl1 corresponds to wireless signal SWireless1 so that the digital information can be flowed to and frommemory 213 a wirelessly. - The digital information can be of many different types. In some embodiments, the digital information corresponds to a recipe that determines the operation of
LED sub-array 120. For example, the recipe can selectively turn on and off the LEDs ofLED sub-array 120 as a function of time, wherein the time can be over many different durations, such as a day, week, month and year, for example. In this way, the recipe stored withmemory 213 a provides a light schedule, and determines the wavelength spectrums provided by the LEDs ofLED sub-array 120. It should be noted that selectively turning on and off the LEDs ofLED sub-array 120 includes turning them all on and turning them all off. - Being able to turn the LEDs of
LED sub-array 120 on and off is useful to control greenhouse lighting. It should be noted that the lighting systems disclosed herein can be readily integrated with greenhouse control systems, such as Argus Controls, Wadsworth Control systems. Further, the recipe can selectively turn on and off the LEDs ofLED sub-array 120 to provide a desired wavelength spectrum. Examples of desired wavelength spectrums are shown inFIGS. 3a, 3b, 3c, 4a, 4b, 4c, 4d, 4e, 4f, 4g, 4h and 4 i. It is useful to turn off the LEDs ofLED sub-array 120 when the accumulated light level for the day reaches a predetermined amount. Various plants need different amounts of light per day, andlighting system 100 f will enable a user to set a threshold light level in response to the chosen plant type. - It should be noted that the recipe stored with
memory 213 a can be replaced with a different recipe. The recipe stored withmemory 213 a can be replaced with a different recipe in many different ways, such as by adjusting control signal SControl1. In some situations, the recipe stored withmemory 213 a is replaced by overwriting it another recipe. Further, in some situations, the recipe stored withmemory 213 a is erased and replaced with another recipe. As mentioned above, control signal SControl1 can be adjusted by adjusting wireless signal SWireless1. Hence, the recipe stored withmemory 213 a can be replaced by with a different recipe in response to flowing a wireless signal tolighting system 100 f. It is useful to replace a recipe stored withmemory 213 a with a different recipe because the lighting conditions affect the ability of different types of plants to grow. Hence, the recipe stored withmemory 213 a can be chosen to provide desired growth conditions for the desired plant type. In this way,lighting system 100 f can be used to effectively grow many different types of plants. -
FIG. 14b is a schematic diagram of another embodiment of a portion oflighting system 100 f ofFIG. 12b . It should be noted that some of the components ofFIG. 14b are also shown inFIG. 2b , and are described in more detail withFIG. 2b . In this embodiment,sensor 211 b is embodied asphotodiode 214 b, wherein one terminal ofphotodiode 214 b is connected tocurrent return 136 and another terminal ofphotodiode 214 b is connected toterminal 10 ofLED driver chip 151, whereinLED driver chip 151 is included withLED driver circuit 141. In this embodiment,LED driver chip 151 is embodied as the LT3477EFE chip manufactured by Linear Technology, Inc. of Milpitas, Calif.Photodiode 214 b provides sense signal SSense2 to terminal 10 in response to receiving incident light 169 b. Sense signal SSense2 is adjustable in response to adjusting a parameter of incident light 169 b. The parameter of incident light 169 b can be of many different types of parameters, such as the intensity and/or wavelength of the light. - As mentioned above, the LT3477EFE chip is connected to electrical components, such as a resistor, inductor, capacitor and a Schottky diode, so that it operates as an LED driver. More information regarding the LT3477EFE chip, and how it is connected to the electrical components to operate as an LED driver, can be found in a corresponding Data Sheet provided by Linear Technology, Inc.
- In this embodiment, a
memory 213 b is connected toterminal 7 ofLED driver chip 151.Memory 213 b provides a memory signal SMem2 toterminal 7 ofLED driver chip 151. In this embodiment,memory 213 b is a digital memory capable of storing digital information. The operation ofLED 121 a is adjustable in response to adjusting memory signal SMem2. In some embodiments,communication module 212 b andantenna 212 b (FIG. 12b ) are in communication withmemory 213 b. In these embodiments,digital information memory 213 b flows betweenmemory 213 b andcommunication module 212 b in control signal SControl2. As mentioned above, control signal SControl2 corresponds to wireless signal SWireless2 so that the digital information can be flowed to and frommemory 213 b wirelessly. - The digital information can be of many different types. In some embodiments, the digital information corresponds to a recipe that determines the operation of
LED sub-array 121. For example, the recipe can selectively turn on and off the LEDs ofLED sub-array 121 as a function of time, wherein the time can be over many different durations, such as a day, week, month and year, for example. In this way, the recipe stored withmemory 213 b provides a light schedule. It should be noted that selectively turning on and off the LEDs ofLED sub-array 121 includes turning them all on and turning them all off. - Being able to turn the LEDs of
LED sub-array 121 on and off is useful to control greenhouse lighting. Further, the recipe can selectively turn on and off the LEDs ofLED sub-array 121 to provide a desired wavelength spectrum. Examples of desired wavelength spectrums are shown inFIGS. 3a, 3b, 3c, 4a, 4b, 4c, 4d, 4e, 4f, 4g, 4h and 4 i. It is useful to turn off the LEDs ofLED sub-array 121 when the accumulated light level for the day reaches a predetermined amount. Various plants need different amounts of light per day, andlighting system 100 f will enable a user to set a threshold light level in response to the chosen plant type. It should be noted thatLED arrays LED arrays - It should also be noted that the recipe stored with
memory 213 b can be replaced with a different recipe. The recipe stored withmemory 213 b can be replaced with a different recipe in many different ways, such as by adjusting control signal SControl2. As mentioned above, control signal SControl2 can be adjusted by adjusting wireless signal SWireless1. Hence, the recipe stored withmemory 213 b can be replaced by with a different recipe in response to flowing a wireless signal tolighting system 100 f. In some situations, the recipe stored withmemory 213 b is replaced by overwriting it another recipe. Further, in some situations, the recipe stored withmemory 213 b is erased and replaced with another recipe. It is useful to replace a recipe stored withmemory 213 b with a different recipe because the lighting conditions affect the ability of different types of plants to grow. Hence, the recipe stored withmemory 213 b can be chosen to provide desired growth conditions for the desired plant type. In this way,lighting system 100 f can be used to effectively grow many different types of plants. It should be noted thatmemories memories -
FIG. 15 is a block diagram of a portion of alighting system 100 g, which can be included with the lighting systems discussed herein, such aslighting systems lighting system 100 g can be included with the components ofFIGS. 13a, 13b, 14a and 14b , if desired.Lighting system 100 g includes an LED controller, such asLED controller 130, but this is not shown inFIG. 15 for simplicity. Further,Lighting system 100 g includes an LED array, such asLED arrays FIG. 15 for simplicity. - In this embodiment,
lighting system 100 g includes acomputer module 215 in communication with anantenna 210 through acommunication module 212, so thatcomputer module 215 receives a control signal SControl. Computer module 215 can includeprogrammable logic controller 133 ofFIG. 10 , and can be in communication withtimer circuit 134, if desired.Computer module 215 is carried by a housing oflighting system 100 g, such aslighting system housing 101. - It should be noted that control signal SControl can correspond to control signals SControl1 and SControl2 discussed above. It should also be noted that
antenna 210 can beantennas communication module 212 can becommunication modules computer module 215 is operatively coupled to an LED controller, such asLED controller 130 and provides control signal SControl3 thereto throughterminal 7 of the LT3477EFE LED driver chip. Hence, the LED controller can include LED controllers 130 a and 130 b discussed above. -
Lighting system 100 g can include one or more sensors. In this embodiment,lighting system 100 g includessensor 211 b operatively coupled tocomputer module 215 so that sense signal SSense2 flows betweencomputer module 215 andsensor 211 b. In this embodiment,lighting system 100 g includessensor 211 a operatively coupled tocomputer module 215 throughantenna 210 andcommunication module 212, so that sense signal SSense1 flows betweencomputer module 215 andsensor 211 b. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, sense signal SSense1 is a wireless signal which flows through awireless link 217 g, and sense signal SSense2 is a wired signal. It should be noted thatsensors 211 a and/or 211 b can be positioned proximate tocomputer module 215 or remotely fromcomputer module 215. - In this embodiment,
lighting system 100 g includes amemory 213.Memory 213 can bememories Memory 213 stores information, such as information corresponding to a recipe. -
Lighting system 100 g can operate in many different ways. In one mode of operation, a first recipe is flowed tocommunication module 212 throughantenna 210, wherein wireless signal SWireless corresponds to information of the first recipe. The information of the first recipe is flowed tocomputer module 215 as control signal SControl1. Computer module 215 can store the first recipe to memory by flowing control signal SControl2 tomemory 213. Further,computer module 215 can flow the information of first recipe LED controller 130 (not shown) as control signal SControl3. The LED array (not shown) oflighting system 100 g will be operated in accordance with the first recipe. - In another mode of operation, a second recipe is flowed to
communication module 212 throughantenna 210, wherein wireless signal SWireless corresponds to information of the second recipe. The information of the second recipe is flowed tocomputer module 215 as control signal SControl1. Computer module 215 can store the second recipe to memory by flowing control signal SControl2 tomemory 213. Further,computer module 215 can flow the information of second recipe LED controller 130 (not shown) as control signal SControl3. The LED array (not shown) oflighting system 100 g will be operated in accordance with the second recipe. - In some of these modes of operation, the first and second recipes are stored with
memory 213, so thatcomputer module 215 can selectively choose one of the first and second recipes. The LED array is then operated in accordance with the chosen recipe. - In other of these modes of operations, the first recipe is replaced by the second recipe. In one example, the first recipe can be overwritten by the second recipe so that the second recipe is stored with
memory 213 and the first recipe is not. In another example, the first recipe is erased in response to a signal fromcomputer module 215, and then the second recipe is stored withmemory 213. -
FIG. 16 is a diagram of alighting system network 107. It should be noted thatlighting system 107 can include the lighting systems discussed in more detail above. In this embodiment,lighting system 107 includes acomputer 215.Computer 215 can be of many different types, such as a laptop computer and desktop computer, which operates in response to a program.Computer 215 can provide useful information regarding the operation oflighting system 107. Forexample computer 215 can determine the power usage oflighting system 107, andcomputer 215 can provide power management and usage analysis. Usage analysis involves many different parameters, such as keeping track of how much light is provided bylighting system 107, as well as the wavelength spectrum of the light provided. -
Computer 215 is capable of establishing a network connection, wherein the network connection allows the flow of information. The network connection can be of many different types, such as a wired network connection. In this embodiment,computer 215 is capable of establishing awireless network connection 217 b with awireless network 216. The network connection can be established in many different ways, such as by using an Ethernet card.Wireless network 216 can be of many different types, such as a Wi-Fi wireless network. It should be noted thatwireless network 216 can include a portion of the Internet, if desired. - In this embodiment,
lighting system 107 includeslighting system 100 d, which is discussed in more detail above withFIGS. 11a-11e . Anetwork connection 217 b is established betweencomputer 215 andlighting system 100 d.Network connection 217 b can be established betweencomputer 215 andlighting system 100 d in many different ways. In this embodiment,network connection 217 b is established by flowing a wireless signal betweencomputer 215 and an antenna oflighting system 100 d. - In this embodiment,
lighting system 107 includeslighting system 100 e, which is discussed in more detail above withFIG. 12a . Anetwork connection 217 c is established betweencomputer 215 andlighting system 100 e.Network connection 217 c can be established betweencomputer 215 andlighting system 100 e in many different ways. In this embodiment,network connection 217 c is established by flowing wireless signal SWireless1 betweencomputer 215 andantenna 210 c oflighting system 100 e. - In this embodiment,
lighting system 107 includeslighting system 100 f, which is discussed in more detail above withFIG. 12b . A network connection 217 d is established betweenlighting system 100 d andlighting system 100 e. Network connection 217 d can be established betweenlighting system 100 d andlighting system 100 e in many different ways. In this embodiment, network connection 217 d is established by flowing wireless signals SWireless1 and SWireless2 betweenlighting system 100 d andantenna 210 c oflighting system 100 e. It should be noted thatlighting system 100 f can be in communication withcomputer 215 throughlighting system 100 d andnetwork connections 217 b and 217 d. In this way,computer 215 can control the operation oflighting systems - In this embodiment,
lighting system 107 includes alighting system 100 g, whereinlighting system 100 g includes a communication module and antenna, such ascommunication module 212 andantenna 210. Anetwork connection 217 e is established betweenwireless network 216 andlighting system 100 g.Network connection 217 e can be established betweenwireless network 216 andlighting system 100 g in many different ways. In this embodiment,network connection 217 e is established by flowing a wireless signal betweenwireless network 216 and the communication module and antenna oflighting system 100 g. It should be noted that, in this embodiment,lighting system 100 g can be in communication withcomputer 215 throughwireless network 216, if desired. In this way,computer 215 can control the operation oflighting system 100 g. It should also be noted thatlighting system 100 g can be in communication with another lighting system throughwireless network 216. For example, in this embodiment,lighting systems wireless network 216 and anetwork connection 217 g, whereinnetwork connection 217 g is established betweenwireless network 216 andlighting system 100 e. - In this embodiment,
lighting system 107 includes alighting system 100 h, whereinlighting system 100 h includes a communication module and antenna, such ascommunication module 212 andantenna 210. A network connection 217 f is established betweenlighting system 100 e andlighting system 100 h. Network connection 217 f can be established betweenlighting system 100 e andlighting system 100 h in many different ways. In this embodiment, network connection 217 f is established by flowing a wireless signal betweenlighting system 100 e and the communication module and antenna oflighting system 100 h. It should be noted thatlighting system 100 h can be in communication withcomputer 215 throughlighting system 100 e andnetwork connections 217 c and 217 f. In this way,computer 215 can control the operation oflighting systems -
Lighting system 107 can operate in many different ways, such as those discussed in more detail above withlighting systems lighting systems computer 215 flows a recipe to each memory. The recipe can be stored withcomputer 215 and selected using a program implemented bycomputer 215. The recipe can be the same for each lighting module and the recipe can be different. Further, it should be noted that the recipe flowed bycomputer 215 can change as a function of time, if desired. The time can be a day, week, month and year, if desired. In this way, the recipe can be changed as desired by the user ofcomputer 215. In one embodiment,lighting systems lighting systems lighting systems lighting systems lighting system 107 can be used to illuminate different zones of a greenhouse. - Disclosed herein are various embodiments of a lighting system which provides many useful functions. The lighting system allows the use of an external light sensor to provide light level data, the intensity of the light provided by the lighting system in a greenhouse can be adjusted to maintain desired light levels. For example, lights can be turned on when a cloud passes overhead, as sensed by a sensor, and turned off as soon as the sunlight has returned.
- Various embodiments of the lighting systems allow photoperiod control, which is used to schedule greenhouse crops such as chrysanthums, poinsettia, and other plants that respond to the day length factors. The software which runs on a computer that operates the lighting systems will simplify the planning and application of such light treatments.
- The lighting systems disclosed herein can alter plant morphology and regulate how plants grow through manipulation of the light spectrum. For example, by altering the levels of blue versus red in conjunction with a reduced Red/Far Red light ratio, more compact plant growth (shorter intermodal lengths) can be achieved. This can produce an effect to plant growth regulators (PGR's) without the actual application of the chemical PGR's.
- The embodiments of the invention described herein are exemplary and numerous modifications, variations and rearrangements can be readily envisioned to achieve substantially equivalent results, all of which are intended to be embraced within the spirit and scope of the invention as defined in the appended claims.
Claims (20)
Priority Applications (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US15/076,579 US10612726B2 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2016-03-21 | Lighting system for color mixing |
US16/822,936 US20200214225A1 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2020-03-18 | Lighting system for color mixing |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US8349908P | 2008-07-24 | 2008-07-24 | |
US12/509,380 US8297782B2 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2009-07-24 | Lighting system for growing plants |
US13/662,467 US9310049B2 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2012-10-27 | Lighting system for growing plants |
US15/076,579 US10612726B2 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2016-03-21 | Lighting system for color mixing |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/662,467 Continuation US9310049B2 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2012-10-27 | Lighting system for growing plants |
Related Child Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US16/822,936 Continuation US20200214225A1 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2020-03-18 | Lighting system for color mixing |
Publications (3)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20190024873A1 US20190024873A1 (en) | 2019-01-24 |
US20190264893A9 true US20190264893A9 (en) | 2019-08-29 |
US10612726B2 US10612726B2 (en) | 2020-04-07 |
Family
ID=41568488
Family Applications (8)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/509,380 Active - Reinstated 2031-01-19 US8297782B2 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2009-07-24 | Lighting system for growing plants |
US13/662,467 Active US9310049B2 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2012-10-27 | Lighting system for growing plants |
US13/662,464 Expired - Fee Related US8668350B2 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2012-10-27 | Lighting system for growing plants |
US13/662,465 Active US9310027B2 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2012-10-27 | Lighting system for growing plants |
US15/076,591 Active US10544904B2 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2016-03-21 | Lighting system for growing plants |
US15/076,579 Active 2029-12-03 US10612726B2 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2016-03-21 | Lighting system for color mixing |
US16/773,862 Abandoned US20200158293A1 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2020-01-27 | Lighting system for growing plants |
US16/822,936 Abandoned US20200214225A1 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2020-03-18 | Lighting system for color mixing |
Family Applications Before (5)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/509,380 Active - Reinstated 2031-01-19 US8297782B2 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2009-07-24 | Lighting system for growing plants |
US13/662,467 Active US9310049B2 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2012-10-27 | Lighting system for growing plants |
US13/662,464 Expired - Fee Related US8668350B2 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2012-10-27 | Lighting system for growing plants |
US13/662,465 Active US9310027B2 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2012-10-27 | Lighting system for growing plants |
US15/076,591 Active US10544904B2 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2016-03-21 | Lighting system for growing plants |
Family Applications After (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US16/773,862 Abandoned US20200158293A1 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2020-01-27 | Lighting system for growing plants |
US16/822,936 Abandoned US20200214225A1 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2020-03-18 | Lighting system for color mixing |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (8) | US8297782B2 (en) |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11457568B2 (en) | 2014-12-15 | 2022-10-04 | Symbiotic Systems, Inc. | Multiple colors, and color palettes, of narrowband photosynthetically active radiation (PAR) time-staged over hours, days, and growing seasons yields superior plant growth |
Families Citing this family (132)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8297782B2 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2012-10-30 | Bafetti Vincent H | Lighting system for growing plants |
WO2010066042A1 (en) * | 2008-12-10 | 2010-06-17 | Jeffery Bucove | A rgb led package for optimized emissions of photosynthetically active radiation |
EP2462797B1 (en) * | 2009-08-07 | 2019-02-27 | Showa Denko K.K. | Multicolor LED lamp for use in plant cultivation, illumination appratus and plant cultivation method |
JP5641472B2 (en) * | 2009-08-26 | 2014-12-17 | パナソニック株式会社 | Pest attracting lighting method and pest attracting lighting system |
US8657463B2 (en) * | 2010-07-01 | 2014-02-25 | Jan Flemming Samuel Lichten | Lighting fixture for a poultry house |
US20120104977A1 (en) * | 2010-07-22 | 2012-05-03 | Hgl Technologies Llc | High performance led grow light |
US20120020071A1 (en) * | 2010-07-22 | 2012-01-26 | Cammie Mckenzie | High performance led grow light |
ES2616308T3 (en) | 2011-03-17 | 2017-06-12 | Valoya Oy | Method for dark growth chambers |
US20130088152A1 (en) * | 2011-03-31 | 2013-04-11 | B-K Lighting, Inc. | Dimming apparatus for solid state lighting fixtures |
US8847514B1 (en) | 2011-05-24 | 2014-09-30 | Aaron Reynoso | Programmable lighting with multi-day variations of wavelength and intensity, optimized by crowdsourcing using an online social community network |
EP2532224A1 (en) * | 2011-06-10 | 2012-12-12 | Valoya Oy | Method and means for improving plant productivity through enhancing insect pollination success in plant cultivation |
EP2723166B1 (en) | 2011-06-22 | 2019-04-03 | Ecotech Marine, LLC | Lighting unit |
CA2752594C (en) * | 2011-06-30 | 2018-12-04 | Xinxin Shan | Networked intelligent plant growth system |
US9408275B2 (en) | 2011-12-02 | 2016-08-02 | Biological Illumination, Llc | System for optimizing light absorbance and associated methods |
US9137874B2 (en) * | 2011-12-02 | 2015-09-15 | Biological Illumination, Llc | Illumination and grow light system and associated methods |
US8826589B2 (en) * | 2012-06-06 | 2014-09-09 | Bluesky Grow Lights, Llc | Light sources and methods for illuminating plants to achieve effective plant growth |
US8739465B2 (en) * | 2012-06-06 | 2014-06-03 | Bluesky Grow Lights, Llc | Light sources and methods for illuminating plants to achieve effective plant growth |
CN104519733B (en) * | 2012-07-10 | 2020-02-21 | 万斯创新公司 | Light source suitable for plant spectral sensitivity |
US10028448B2 (en) * | 2012-07-10 | 2018-07-24 | Once Innovations, Inc. | Light sources adapted to spectral sensitivity of plants |
JP2015530077A (en) * | 2012-07-18 | 2015-10-15 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エヌ ヴェ | Method for applying horticultural light to crop and lighting device for horticultural lighting |
US9206966B2 (en) * | 2012-09-12 | 2015-12-08 | Sensity Systems Inc. | Method and apparatus for optimized plant growth |
US10602669B2 (en) * | 2012-10-15 | 2020-03-31 | Symbiotic Systems, Inc. | Narrowband photosynthetically active radiation (“PAR”) substantially only at each of multiple emission wavelengths yields good photosynthesis at reduced energy cost |
US9282698B2 (en) * | 2012-11-27 | 2016-03-15 | James H. Beyer | Light emitting diode grow light for plant growing applications |
PL2934089T3 (en) * | 2012-12-21 | 2017-08-31 | Philips Lighting Holding B.V. | A horticulture lighting interface for interfacing at least one lighting system |
KR20140102481A (en) * | 2013-02-14 | 2014-08-22 | 서울바이오시스 주식회사 | Ginseng cultivation apparatus for producing panax ginseng having high content of ginsenosides |
DE102013005934A1 (en) * | 2013-04-05 | 2014-10-23 | Cooper Crouse-Hinds Gmbh | LED module, luminaire with such and method for influencing a light spectrum |
DE102013005932A1 (en) * | 2013-04-05 | 2014-10-23 | Cooper Crouse-Hinds Gmbh | LED module, luminaire with such and method for influencing a light spectrum |
JP2015000036A (en) * | 2013-06-17 | 2015-01-05 | 交和電気産業株式会社 | Illumination device |
JP6268516B2 (en) * | 2013-11-13 | 2018-01-31 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | Crop cultivation system |
MX370298B (en) * | 2014-02-10 | 2019-12-09 | Biolumic Ltd | Improvements in and relating to controlling characteristics of photosynthetic organisms. |
AU2015230049B2 (en) | 2014-03-14 | 2018-07-26 | Biolumic Limited | Method to improve crop yield and/or quality |
EP3130199A1 (en) * | 2014-04-08 | 2017-02-15 | Nxp B.V. | A controller for a horticultural lighting system |
CN103947526A (en) * | 2014-05-05 | 2014-07-30 | 安徽科技学院 | Method of controlling light source generated in water spinach room |
CN103999749B (en) * | 2014-05-05 | 2016-06-29 | 安徽科技学院 | A kind of technology utilizing LED light source to carry out gynura bicolor indoor production |
CN103960015B (en) * | 2014-05-05 | 2016-08-17 | 安徽科技学院 | A kind of method of beta vulgaris indoor production |
WO2015189112A1 (en) * | 2014-06-10 | 2015-12-17 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Light emitting arrangement with adjustable emission spectrum |
CN106664756B (en) | 2014-06-16 | 2019-02-22 | 伦斯莱尔工艺研究院 | System and method for lighting environment |
ES2893880T3 (en) * | 2014-07-17 | 2022-02-10 | Signify Holding Bv | Horticultural lighting apparatus and method |
US10244595B2 (en) | 2014-07-21 | 2019-03-26 | Once Innovations, Inc. | Photonic engine system for actuating the photosynthetic electron transport chain |
US10480750B2 (en) * | 2014-09-09 | 2019-11-19 | Shenzhen Keweitian Eco-Lighting Co., LTD | Solar spectrum-like LED structure |
JP2017529076A (en) | 2014-09-17 | 2017-10-05 | バイオルミック リミテッド | Seed treatment method and resulting product |
CN104390158A (en) * | 2014-10-22 | 2015-03-04 | 中国科学院宁波材料技术与工程研究所湖州新能源产业创新中心 | LED plant lamp based on chlorophyll absorption spectrum feature design |
KR101502960B1 (en) * | 2014-10-29 | 2015-03-17 | 농업회사법인 주식회사 퓨쳐그린 | LED lighting module for optimizing inception growth efficiency of plant, LED lighting apparatus for plant-culture factory using the same |
US10149439B2 (en) * | 2014-12-18 | 2018-12-11 | Spectra Harvest Lighting, LLC | LED grow light system |
US9526155B2 (en) | 2014-12-30 | 2016-12-20 | Google Inc. | Systems and methods of controlling light sources according to location |
US10492375B2 (en) * | 2015-01-09 | 2019-12-03 | Grow Solutions Tech Llc | Systems and methods for providing grow lighting |
US10111392B2 (en) * | 2015-03-09 | 2018-10-30 | LED Living Technology | Lighting system for promoting the rapid maturation of commercial plants |
MX2017012255A (en) * | 2015-03-25 | 2018-06-27 | Vitabeam Ltd | Method and apparatus for stimulation of plant growth and development with near infrared and visible lights. |
US11116143B2 (en) * | 2015-03-25 | 2021-09-14 | Vitabeam Ltd. | Method and an apparatus for stimulation of plant growth and development with near infrared and visible lights |
US9681515B2 (en) * | 2015-05-13 | 2017-06-13 | Juha Rantala | LED structure with a dynamic spectrum and a method |
US9943042B2 (en) | 2015-05-18 | 2018-04-17 | Biological Innovation & Optimization Systems, LLC | Grow light embodying power delivery and data communications features |
US10743480B2 (en) * | 2015-07-02 | 2020-08-18 | Astro Space, Llc | Agile spectrum greenhouse LED lighting fixture and control |
WO2017012644A1 (en) * | 2015-07-17 | 2017-01-26 | Urban Crops | Industrial plant growing facility and methods of use |
US9958115B2 (en) | 2015-07-22 | 2018-05-01 | Qin Kong | LED tube grow light |
US9788387B2 (en) * | 2015-09-15 | 2017-10-10 | Biological Innovation & Optimization Systems, LLC | Systems and methods for controlling the spectral content of LED lighting devices |
US9844116B2 (en) * | 2015-09-15 | 2017-12-12 | Biological Innovation & Optimization Systems, LLC | Systems and methods for controlling the spectral content of LED lighting devices |
EP3143869A1 (en) * | 2015-09-17 | 2017-03-22 | Université d'Avignon et des Pays de Vaucluse | Method for stimulating the resistance of plants to biotic stress by uv radiation exposure |
BE1023465B1 (en) * | 2015-09-28 | 2017-03-29 | Culture Crew Bvba | Lighting module |
WO2017059124A1 (en) | 2015-09-29 | 2017-04-06 | Cabatech, Llc | Horticulture grow lights |
US20180206411A1 (en) * | 2015-10-14 | 2018-07-26 | Starlight Led Inc. | Led flip chip plant grow light |
CA3002581C (en) | 2015-11-10 | 2023-02-28 | Hubbell Incorporated | Antimicrobial light source array system |
US20170142813A1 (en) * | 2015-11-11 | 2017-05-18 | Ranbir S. Sahni | Intelligent controller |
EP3393232A1 (en) * | 2015-12-21 | 2018-10-31 | Rhenac Greentec AG | Light-emitter device and method for promoting grass growth |
GB201602029D0 (en) * | 2016-02-04 | 2016-03-23 | Aurora Ltd | Horticultural lighting device |
CN105830905A (en) * | 2016-03-25 | 2016-08-10 | 京东方光科技有限公司 | Plant hydroponic culture frame and plant growth environment protection system |
US10165735B1 (en) * | 2016-06-29 | 2019-01-01 | Full Spectrum Industries Corp. | Dynamic plant lighting systems and methods |
CN106248882B (en) * | 2016-08-19 | 2018-04-17 | 河北神通光电科技有限公司 | The method for obtaining the red blue spectrum ratios of plant illumination LED |
BR112019003577A2 (en) | 2016-08-22 | 2019-05-21 | Biolumic Ltd | seed treatment methods and resulting products |
US10595376B2 (en) | 2016-09-13 | 2020-03-17 | Biological Innovation & Optimization Systems, LLC | Systems and methods for controlling the spectral content of LED lighting devices |
US11129248B2 (en) * | 2016-09-25 | 2021-09-21 | Illum Horticulture Llc | Method and apparatus for an indoor horticultural facility |
US10159133B2 (en) * | 2016-10-14 | 2018-12-18 | BlueOcean IoT, LLC | System for distributing low-voltage DC power to LED luminaires |
US11272594B2 (en) | 2016-10-31 | 2022-03-08 | Hubbell Incorporated | Multi-array lighting system for providing high intensity narrow spectrum light |
US10232066B2 (en) | 2016-10-31 | 2019-03-19 | Hubbell Incorporated | High intensity narrow spectrum light indicator systems |
WO2018109995A1 (en) * | 2016-12-12 | 2018-06-21 | オリンパス株式会社 | Light source device |
US11212967B2 (en) | 2017-01-20 | 2022-01-04 | Hgci, Inc. | Light emitting structures |
JP6912073B2 (en) * | 2017-01-20 | 2021-07-28 | 株式会社キーストーンテクノロジー | Leafy vegetable production method and leafy vegetable production equipment |
AU2018263928A1 (en) | 2017-05-02 | 2019-12-05 | Lumigrow, Inc. | Lighting system and sensor array for growing plants |
US10524433B2 (en) * | 2017-05-08 | 2020-01-07 | Daniel S. Spiro | Automated vertical plant cultivation system |
US11147215B2 (en) | 2017-05-08 | 2021-10-19 | Daniel S. Spiro | Automated outdoor modular vertical plant cultivation system |
US11304390B2 (en) | 2017-05-08 | 2022-04-19 | Urban Planter, Llc | Automated vertical plant cultivation system |
US11617309B2 (en) | 2017-05-08 | 2023-04-04 | Urban Planter, Llc | Automated vertical plant cultivation system |
US11129339B2 (en) | 2017-05-08 | 2021-09-28 | Daniel S. Spiro | Automated vertical plant cultivation system |
US11122748B2 (en) | 2017-05-08 | 2021-09-21 | Daniel S. Spiro | Automated outdoor modular vertical plant cultivation system |
US11622510B2 (en) | 2017-05-08 | 2023-04-11 | Urban Planter, Llc | Automated vertical plant cultivation system |
CN107124223A (en) * | 2017-05-23 | 2017-09-01 | 中国科学院半导体研究所 | To the transmitting terminal of latent communication, receiving terminal and to communication system of diving |
CN111279127B (en) | 2017-08-25 | 2023-03-31 | 阿格尼泰克斯股份有限公司 | Lighting fixture, lighting system, controlled environment agricultural system and method |
US11013078B2 (en) | 2017-09-19 | 2021-05-18 | Agnetix, Inc. | Integrated sensor assembly for LED-based controlled environment agriculture (CEA) lighting, and methods and apparatus employing same |
US10999976B2 (en) | 2017-09-19 | 2021-05-11 | Agnetix, Inc. | Fluid-cooled lighting systems and kits for controlled agricultural environments, and methods for installing same |
WO2019089576A1 (en) | 2017-10-30 | 2019-05-09 | Hubbell Incorporated | Antimicrobial backlit device |
US11590248B2 (en) | 2017-10-30 | 2023-02-28 | Hubbell Lighting, Inc. | Pulsing high intensity narrow spectrum light |
US11617316B2 (en) * | 2017-11-10 | 2023-04-04 | James S. Ray | Apparatus and methods for a hydroponics system with enhanced heat transfer |
CN107734790A (en) * | 2017-11-24 | 2018-02-23 | 山西高科华烨电子集团有限公司 | LED plant lamp light adjusting systems |
US11778955B2 (en) | 2017-11-29 | 2023-10-10 | Urban Planter, Llc | Automated vertical plant cultivation system |
US10595387B2 (en) * | 2017-12-18 | 2020-03-17 | George Mekhtarian | Driveless LED fixture |
US20190195478A1 (en) * | 2017-12-21 | 2019-06-27 | Circuit Services, LLC | Lighting apparatus including a distance sensor for indoor plants |
CN110100597A (en) * | 2018-01-30 | 2019-08-09 | 京东方光科技有限公司 | Plants planter and plant cover cultivation methods |
US11266076B2 (en) * | 2018-01-31 | 2022-03-08 | Fluence Bioengineering, Inc. | Lighting device and a method of distributing light radiation sources |
US10238043B1 (en) * | 2018-02-28 | 2019-03-26 | Spectrum King LLC | Full spectrum LED grow light system |
CA3099262A1 (en) | 2018-05-04 | 2019-11-07 | Agnetix, Inc. | Methods, apparatus, and systems for lighting and distributed sensing in controlled agricultural environments |
JP2020018210A (en) * | 2018-07-31 | 2020-02-06 | 株式会社リコー | Cultivation system |
US11291164B2 (en) | 2018-08-24 | 2022-04-05 | Seoul Viosys Co., Ltd. | Light source for plant cultivation |
US10820532B2 (en) * | 2018-08-24 | 2020-11-03 | Seoul Viosys Co., Ltd. | Light source for plant cultivation |
CN109099326A (en) * | 2018-09-20 | 2018-12-28 | 横店集团得邦照明股份有限公司 | A kind of spectrum stage by stage promotes the LED light and its implementation of plant growth |
US20200100491A1 (en) * | 2018-09-28 | 2020-04-02 | Vital Vio, Inc. | Inactivation of Insects With Light |
KR102635813B1 (en) | 2018-11-13 | 2024-02-08 | 아그네틱스, 인크. | Fluid-cooled LED-based lighting method and apparatus for environmentally controlled agriculture with integrated cameras and/or sensors and wireless communication means |
CN109587885A (en) * | 2018-12-20 | 2019-04-05 | 佛山市南海区昭裕照明有限公司 | Intelligent power multichannel dimming control system |
US10440900B1 (en) | 2019-01-22 | 2019-10-15 | Calyx Cultivation Tech. Corp. | Grow light with adjustable height and emission spectrum |
WO2020190458A1 (en) | 2019-03-18 | 2020-09-24 | Hubbell Incorporated | Method for controlling operation of a lighting system having high intensity narrow spectrum light sources |
NL2023151B1 (en) * | 2019-05-16 | 2020-12-01 | Oreon Holding B V | Assimilation lighting with improved spectrum |
WO2020231267A1 (en) | 2019-05-16 | 2020-11-19 | Oreon Holding B.V. | Assimilation lighting with improved spectrum |
US11304376B2 (en) | 2019-05-20 | 2022-04-19 | Seoul Semiconductor Co., Ltd. | Light source for plant cultivation |
US11402089B2 (en) | 2019-06-06 | 2022-08-02 | Abundant Lighting Technology, Llc | LED growth light |
DE102019209014A1 (en) * | 2019-06-20 | 2020-12-24 | GND Solutions GmbH | System and method for the cultivation of a plant stand |
US12003840B2 (en) * | 2019-07-30 | 2024-06-04 | Carvana, LLC | Light emitting diode fixtures for vehicle photographic systems |
KR20210053033A (en) * | 2019-11-01 | 2021-05-11 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | plants cultivation apparatus |
JP2023505677A (en) | 2019-12-10 | 2023-02-10 | アグネティックス,インコーポレイテッド | Multi-perceptual imaging method and apparatus for controlled environmental horticulture using illuminators and cameras and/or sensors |
JP2023505995A (en) | 2019-12-12 | 2023-02-14 | アグネティックス,インコーポレイテッド | Fluid-cooled LED-based luminaires in proximity cultivation systems for controlled-environment horticulture |
US11910762B2 (en) * | 2020-01-03 | 2024-02-27 | Industry-University Cooperation Foundation Of Chungbuk National University | Light source module for plant cultivation |
US11032976B1 (en) | 2020-03-16 | 2021-06-15 | Hgci, Inc. | Light fixture for indoor grow application and components thereof |
AU2020436352A1 (en) * | 2020-03-16 | 2022-11-10 | Hgci, Inc. | Light fixture for indoor grow application and components thereof |
US11499707B2 (en) | 2020-04-13 | 2022-11-15 | Calyxpure, Inc. | Light fixture having a fan and ultraviolet sterilization functionality |
CN111459215B (en) * | 2020-04-17 | 2020-12-22 | 江苏力行电力电子科技有限公司 | Self-adaptive dimming energy-saving control system |
CN211853862U (en) * | 2020-05-13 | 2020-11-03 | 厦门海莱照明有限公司 | Plant lamp |
WO2021247649A1 (en) * | 2020-06-02 | 2021-12-09 | Iotta, Llc | Image capture system and processing |
CN113170670B (en) * | 2020-11-25 | 2022-06-14 | 安徽金晟达生物电子科技有限公司 | Plant light filling lamp plate of adjustable light quality |
US11457571B2 (en) | 2020-12-02 | 2022-10-04 | Haier Us Appliance Solutions, Inc. | Modular lighting system for an indoor garden center |
DE102020133237A1 (en) | 2020-12-11 | 2022-06-15 | Dh Licht Gmbh | LED circuit board module for providing a photobiologically active full spectrum |
US20220330489A1 (en) * | 2021-03-03 | 2022-10-20 | Seoul Viosys Co., Ltd. | Light source module and plants cultivation device including the same |
US11759540B2 (en) | 2021-05-11 | 2023-09-19 | Calyxpure, Inc. | Portable disinfection unit |
CN113573434A (en) * | 2021-06-15 | 2021-10-29 | 中国人民解放军63919部队 | Plant lighting system capable of adjusting spectrum light intensity |
US20230140415A1 (en) * | 2021-09-28 | 2023-05-04 | Open Platform Systems, Llc | Horticulture Smart Driver |
CN115623932A (en) * | 2022-09-23 | 2023-01-20 | 深圳市富尔顿照明科技有限公司 | Full-spectrum illumination method and device for plants |
Family Cites Families (20)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5012609A (en) | 1988-12-12 | 1991-05-07 | Automated Agriculture Associates, Inc. | Method and apparatus for irradiation of plants using optoelectronic devices |
US5278432A (en) | 1992-08-27 | 1994-01-11 | Quantam Devices, Inc. | Apparatus for providing radiant energy |
TW421994U (en) | 2000-05-30 | 2001-02-11 | Wei Fang | Plant cultivation device using LED as light source |
US6602275B1 (en) | 2000-09-18 | 2003-08-05 | Jana Sullivan | Device and method for therapeutic treatment of living organisms |
US6688759B1 (en) | 2002-05-15 | 2004-02-10 | Andrew Hadjimichael | Plant growth-enhancing lamp device |
US20040189555A1 (en) | 2003-03-26 | 2004-09-30 | Capen Larry Stephen | Use of track lighting switching power supplies to efficiently drive LED arrays |
US6921182B2 (en) | 2003-05-13 | 2005-07-26 | Solaroasis | Efficient LED lamp for enhancing commercial and home plant growth |
US7212287B2 (en) * | 2004-08-05 | 2007-05-01 | Avago Technologies Ecbu Ip (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | Providing optical feedback on light color |
US20070058368A1 (en) | 2005-09-09 | 2007-03-15 | Partee Adam M | Efficient high brightness led system that generates radiometric light energy capable of controlling growth of plants from seed to full maturity |
US7922353B2 (en) * | 2006-03-20 | 2011-04-12 | Larson Isely | Apparatus, method and system for providing multi-mode illumination |
WO2007147242A1 (en) | 2006-06-19 | 2007-12-27 | Theoreme Innovation Inc. | Led luminaire |
TWI323141B (en) * | 2006-09-15 | 2010-04-01 | Coretronic Corp | Method of remedying a plurality of monochromatic light from a plurality of light-emitting diodes and the light-emitting diode control system utilizing the method |
US20080094857A1 (en) * | 2006-10-20 | 2008-04-24 | Smith Robert B | LED light bulb |
DE102007003345B4 (en) * | 2007-01-17 | 2010-07-29 | Erco Gmbh | Light Control System |
JP4514770B2 (en) * | 2007-05-10 | 2010-07-28 | 日本テキサス・インスツルメンツ株式会社 | Backlight device |
US8297782B2 (en) | 2008-07-24 | 2012-10-30 | Bafetti Vincent H | Lighting system for growing plants |
US20110121734A1 (en) * | 2009-11-25 | 2011-05-26 | Ryan Bernard Pape | Light emitting diode (led) beacon |
US8641241B2 (en) * | 2010-12-14 | 2014-02-04 | Bridgelux, Inc. | Gimbaled LED array module |
US9410664B2 (en) * | 2013-08-29 | 2016-08-09 | Soraa, Inc. | Circadian friendly LED light source |
US9736994B2 (en) * | 2014-08-19 | 2017-08-22 | Edward Leonard Haggarty | Lighting device, assembly and method for growing horticulture indoors |
-
2009
- 2009-07-24 US US12/509,380 patent/US8297782B2/en active Active - Reinstated
-
2012
- 2012-10-27 US US13/662,467 patent/US9310049B2/en active Active
- 2012-10-27 US US13/662,464 patent/US8668350B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2012-10-27 US US13/662,465 patent/US9310027B2/en active Active
-
2016
- 2016-03-21 US US15/076,591 patent/US10544904B2/en active Active
- 2016-03-21 US US15/076,579 patent/US10612726B2/en active Active
-
2020
- 2020-01-27 US US16/773,862 patent/US20200158293A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2020-03-18 US US16/822,936 patent/US20200214225A1/en not_active Abandoned
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11457568B2 (en) | 2014-12-15 | 2022-10-04 | Symbiotic Systems, Inc. | Multiple colors, and color palettes, of narrowband photosynthetically active radiation (PAR) time-staged over hours, days, and growing seasons yields superior plant growth |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US10612726B2 (en) | 2020-04-07 |
US20100020536A1 (en) | 2010-01-28 |
US20200214225A1 (en) | 2020-07-09 |
US8668350B2 (en) | 2014-03-11 |
US20130293156A1 (en) | 2013-11-07 |
US10544904B2 (en) | 2020-01-28 |
US20190024873A1 (en) | 2019-01-24 |
US9310027B2 (en) | 2016-04-12 |
US20190178451A1 (en) | 2019-06-13 |
US20200158293A1 (en) | 2020-05-21 |
US20130049635A1 (en) | 2013-02-28 |
US20130294065A1 (en) | 2013-11-07 |
US9310049B2 (en) | 2016-04-12 |
US8297782B2 (en) | 2012-10-30 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20200214225A1 (en) | Lighting system for color mixing | |
JP6777327B2 (en) | Photon modulation management system | |
JP7152038B2 (en) | Photon modulation management system | |
US10973173B2 (en) | Light sources adapted to spectral sensitivity of plants | |
US10512221B2 (en) | Lighting system and sensor array for growing plants | |
KR101368289B1 (en) | Plant cultivation smart LED illuminating system | |
KR101802189B1 (en) | Intelligent illumination apparatus and intelligent plant cultivating system based on situation recognition having the same, and a method thereof | |
CN105746202A (en) | LED plant illuminating system and method based on PC/mobile terminal remote control | |
EP1479286A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for irradiation of plants using light emitting diodes | |
CA2679330A1 (en) | System for modulating plant growth or attributes | |
WO2002067660A1 (en) | Method of cultivating plant and illuminator for cultivating plant | |
KR101164006B1 (en) | LED Lighting Device for Plant Cultivation and thereby Cultivation Method | |
KR20150033364A (en) | Plant factory LED lighting system with controllable light source | |
KR20190140148A (en) | system for supplementing main light using variable artificial light and light sensing device therefor | |
US20190320590A1 (en) | Adaptive Photosynthetically Active Radiation (PAR) Sensor With Daylight Integral (DLI) Control System Incorporating Lumen Maintenance | |
KR20200000398A (en) | system for supplementing main light using variable artificial light and light sensing device therefor | |
KR101368781B1 (en) | System for lightning environment of greenhouse | |
KR101191618B1 (en) | System and method for growing plants by using led illumination, led illumination apparatus for growing plants and driving method thereof | |
US20210329850A1 (en) | Adaptive photosynthetically active radiation (par) sensor with daylight integral (dli) control system incorporating lumen maintenance | |
KR20230021303A (en) | Led lamp for smart farm | |
RU191025U1 (en) | LED lamp for plants | |
US20230140415A1 (en) | Horticulture Smart Driver | |
US20240074014A1 (en) | Lighting control systems and methods | |
CN213810209U (en) | Plant growing lamp | |
RU186783U1 (en) | LED LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE FOR INCREASING PLANT GROWTH |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: WINDSAIL CREDIT FUND, L.P., AS ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT, MASSACHUSETTS Free format text: SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:LUMIGROW, INC.;REEL/FRAME:043262/0795 Effective date: 20170810 Owner name: WINDSAIL CREDIT FUND, L.P., AS ADMINISTRATIVE AGEN Free format text: SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:LUMIGROW, INC.;REEL/FRAME:043262/0795 Effective date: 20170810 |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: LUMIGROW, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:WELLS, KEVIN T.;REEL/FRAME:045498/0275 Effective date: 20110620 |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
FEPP | Fee payment procedure |
Free format text: PETITION RELATED TO MAINTENANCE FEES GRANTED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: PTGR); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY Free format text: PETITION RELATED TO MAINTENANCE FEES GRANTED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: PTGR); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: SMALL ENTITY |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NOTICE OF ALLOWANCE MAILED -- APPLICATION RECEIVED IN OFFICE OF PUBLICATIONS |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: PUBLICATIONS -- ISSUE FEE PAYMENT RECEIVED |
|
STCF | Information on status: patent grant |
Free format text: PATENTED CASE |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: WINDSAIL CAPITAL FUND, L.P., MASSACHUSETTS Free format text: SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:LUMIGROW, INC.;REEL/FRAME:052753/0163 Effective date: 20200522 |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: AGTECH HOLDINGS, INC., ILLINOIS Free format text: FORECLOSURE SALE;ASSIGNOR:WINDSAIL CAPITAL FUND, L.P., AS SECURED PARTY;REEL/FRAME:060119/0641 Effective date: 20200911 Owner name: WINDSAIL CAPITAL FUND, L.P., MASSACHUSETTS Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:WINDSAIL CREDIT FUND, L.P.;REEL/FRAME:060119/0394 Effective date: 20180101 |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: SIGNIFY HOLDING B.V., NETHERLANDS Free format text: RELEASE BY SECURED PARTY;ASSIGNOR:WINDSAIL CAPITAL FUND, L.P.;REEL/FRAME:061225/0425 Effective date: 20220818 Owner name: SIGNIFY HOLDING B.V., NETHERLANDS Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:AGTECH HOLDINGS, INC.;REEL/FRAME:061225/0294 Effective date: 20220818 |
|
FEPP | Fee payment procedure |
Free format text: ENTITY STATUS SET TO UNDISCOUNTED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: BIG.); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY |
|
MAFP | Maintenance fee payment |
Free format text: PAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEE, 4TH YEAR, LARGE ENTITY (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: M1551); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY Year of fee payment: 4 |